diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:45:50 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:45:50 -0700 |
| commit | cbd012586f1b963fa6edf63883af7d1840272d62 (patch) | |
| tree | 99a0da52e0537a60b45a60576cfc8c36271a83a3 /21760-h | |
Diffstat (limited to '21760-h')
25 files changed, 9877 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21760-h/21760-h.htm b/21760-h/21760-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fa5de1 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/21760-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9877 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + @media print { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; } + } + @media screen { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;} + .pagenum a {text-decoration:none; color:#444;} + .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;} + } + + div.frontmatter {max-width: 40em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + page-break-before: always; } + + body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em; + max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + p {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;} + p.noindent {text-indent: 0em;} + p.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} + p.titleblock {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;} + p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;} + p.chapter {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;} + + h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; } + + h1,h2,h3,h4 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; /* font-weight: normal; */ page-break-after: avoid ! important;} + hr {width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; + clear: both;} + hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;} + hr.sorta {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + hr.minor {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;} + td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; } + td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify; + margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;} + + body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + + a {text-decoration: none;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + .figleft {margin: auto; float: left; text-align: left;} + .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;} + .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;} + img {border: none;} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 85%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange +Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands</p> +<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p> +<p>Release Date: June 7, 2007 [eBook #21760]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="550" height="796" alt="Cover" title="Cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="major" /> +<p class="center"> +<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span> +</p> + +<div class="frontmatter"> + +<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;"> +A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating +the remarkable experiences of two boys and a man, +who are cast upon an island in the South Seas with +absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the +exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning +clothing, tools and weapons and not only do they train +nature's forces to work for them but they subdue and +finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The books +contain two thousand items of interest that every boy +ought to know.</p> + +<p class="center"> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Castaways<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Exploring the Island<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Mysteries of the Caverns<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Tribesmen<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Capture and Pursuit<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Conquest of the Savages<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Adventures on Strange Islands<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Treasures of the Islands<br /> +<br /><br /> + <i>Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.</i><br /> + <i>60 cents per vol., postpaid.</i><br /> +<br /> +<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue New York</span></span> +</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<h2>ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS</h2> +<hr class="major" /> + +<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1"> + <col style="width:80%;" /> + <tr> + <td align="center"> +<br /><br /> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; +font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">ADVENTURES ON<br />STRANGE ISLANDS</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;"> +<img src="images/inybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" /> +<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span> +</div> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps; margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p> + </td> + </tr> +</table> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;" > +<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1915, by</span> +<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span> +</p> + +<hr class="sorta" /> +<h3>CONTENTS</h3> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<col style="width:5%;" /> +<col style="width:80%;" /> +<col style="width:15%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td> + <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">I.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Strange Oars and Ropes</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_15">Page 15</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The charted island. Previous history of the boys. The professor. +Mysteries. The strange oars and ropes. Experiments. The various +trips through the Island. Meeting the natives. The caves. +Finding metals and ores. A strange village.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">II.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">A Mysterious Message</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_26">Page 26</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Town of Unity. Enterprises on the island. Building a ship. +Homesick. Considering the question of other islands. Treasure +hunting. The Krishnos. Their beliefs and practices. The +comparison of customs with the white people. Preparing to launch +the vessel. The professor decides to remain. Angel. The message. +Blakely. A scrap of paper with illegible words. The V-shaped +tracing. Guessing the contents of the note.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">III.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><span class="smcap">The Arrow on the Sheet</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_38">Page 38</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Deciphering the discolored paper. The arrow on the +sheet. The first Walter letter. The comparison. Dimensions +of the vessel. The engine. The professor and +John's error. Pointing to an island. Convinced of the +correctness of the boys' views. Launching of the vessel. +The feast day. Putting up the rigging. Selecting a crew. +Preliminary trials. The day for departure. The trip to +Valparaiso. Reshipping to New York. Telegrams home +after three years. Angels and the wonders of New York. +The great change in the boys. The return to Wonder +Island. Reaching Valparaiso. Meeting Blakely. The new +steamer. Installation of a line to Wonder Island. The +return trip.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">IV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><span class="smcap">The Skull with the Cryptic Writing</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_51">Page 51</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Steaming up Enterprise River. Unity in sight. The natives +at the wharf. The enthusiasm. The chiefs witness +the arrival. A "Grand Homecoming." The boys visit the +natives. Contemplating voyages to discover other islands. +Native sailors. Sutoto captain of the <i>Pioneer</i>. Rumors +about the boys. Plans for the proposed trips. The force +for the expedition. A cargo of copper. The trip to the +copper treasure cave. Tides. Fireflies. Explanation of +the light. Light without heat The problem of light. +Advantages of light which generates no heat. Color of +daylight. Phosphorescent glow. Catching fireflies. +Scaling the heights. The spot where the Walter note +was found. A skull with mysterious characters on it. +The mark on the skull and the mark in the message. +The star. Cryptic signs.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">V.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><span class="smcap">The Trip to the New Island</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_63">Page 63</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto at the top of the peak. The telescope. The view +of Unity. The Illyas' village. The visit to the last captured +village. The reception. The kindness of the chief. +The great change in the village. The feast of John and +the boys. Happiness of the people. The Illyas at work. +Return of the <i>Wonder</i> to Unity. The <i>Pioneer</i> on its way +to other Islands. Seasickness of the crew. Trying the +new cure. Atrophine, and how administered. Explaining +its origin, and how it acts. The effect on the crew. +Driven out of their course. A light in the dense darkness. +Land ahead. Awaiting the morning. Fifty leagues +from Wonder Island. The cove in the shore line. Anchoring. +The two boats sent ashore. Signs to indicate that +people lived on the island. Reminiscences of the Yaks and +bears. The discovery of coffee trees. The wild variety. +Identity of vegetation in widely-separated countries.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><span class="smcap">Discovery of the Island and Explorations</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_78">Page 75</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Return to the landing. John's advice. Surveying the +island. The cardinal points of the compass. Laying out +the coast line by triangulation. What measurement of +angles means. Transferring the angles to paper. Making +plans by means of a scale. Proportionate lengths of the +different limbs of the angles. The shore line to the south. +Instructions to Sutoto. The party to explore the interior. +Starting on their mission. The equipment of the party. +The spears, and bolos. The camera and field glasses. +Amazing tropical vegetation and fruit. Stone hatchet +found. Independent exploits of the boys. Temporary +separation. Disappearance of George. A pistol shot in +the distance. The search. Evidences of a scuffle. +George's tracks found. The footprints of natives. Muro +scouting in the direction of the natives. The runner to +the ship. The <i>Pioneer</i> sailing away. The new landing +place. Uraso advised of the capture.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><span class="smcap">Capture of George by the Natives</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_89">Page 89</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>George's capture. Hearing John's whistle. Firing the +gun. The surprise of the natives. Rendered unconscious. +He recovers. Sees his gun and glasses in the hands of the +natives. Discovers that his revolver is still in his pocket. +The natives see him trying to discover the time by his +watch. The fight of the savages for the watch. George's +determination to escape. The natives discover the revolver. +He surprises the natives by explaining the knife +and glasses. While explaining the glasses accidentally +discovers the ocean in the distance. The matchsafe. Discovers +the village. Tries to escape before reaching there. +Planning the details. Surprised at the appearance of +another party. All hope lost. A powerful Chief. George +and the Chief. Investigating George's belongings. How +George unwittingly told the Chief about the gun and +glasses. The Chief arrests the captors. George explains +the weapons. Returns the revolver to George. Invites +him to the village. In the home of the Chieftain. Description +of the "Palace."</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><span class="smcap">Fight of the Natives for the Trinkets</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_102">Page 102</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Scouting. Muro's work. The first traces. Arrival of +Uraso. His grief at the news. The conference. John +and party march to the east. Finding George's chain. +Evidences of a struggle. Determining the number of enemies +by the footprints. Reading characters by feet. +How people are distinguished. Observing peculiarities of +actions. Estimating the number of natives in the party +which captured George. Discovering the Chief's footmarks. +Judging of the safety of George by the marks of +the feet. Uraso discovers the tree where George exhibited +the power of the bullet to the Chief. Inferences as to the +characters of the natives who captured George. The +trinkets and buttons of more importance to the savages +than the person of the captive. Power as the great factor +with savages. Why right is might.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">IX.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><span class="smcap">The Giant Chief and His "Palace"</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_113">Page 113</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief interested in George's belongings. Discovery of +a ship's chair. The matchsafe in the Chief's hands. The +imitative quality. The first meal. The peculiar knives +and forks. The Chief's capacity for food. The character +of the meal. The siesta after the meal. George's opportunity. +Stealing from the Chief's house. The daughter +of the Chief. Wandering from the Chief's house. His +midnight sleep from exhaustion. The watchers at his bedside. +Finding the soap plant. Breakfast. Absence of +the Chief. George's suspicions. Follows the Chief. The +appearance of John and Harry. The meeting. George introduces +the party to the Chief. Uraso and Muro able to +converse with the Chief. George's story. "The Palace." +The village. The feast.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">X.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><span class="smcap">Peculiarities of the Native Tribe</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_125">Page 125</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>How the feast was served. John relates the story of the +boys to the Chief. The Chief interested in the wonderful +ship. The story of the island. The runner to the ship. +No Krishnos on the islands. Sutoto sees the runners. +Sails for the village. The Chief does not believe in a great +spirit. His philosophy. Strength is the only right. No +caves on the island. Disappointment of the boys. Bad +people to the north. Their own kin, but convicts. Stealing +and lying the only crimes. No crime to steal from +each other, only from the Chief. The sun as a great Chief. +The coming of the ship. The natives on the seashore. +Casting of the anchor. Sutoto sees the Chief's daughter. +George's captors on the way to the convict colony. Intercession +on the part of the boys. The food at the banquet. +The natives' aversion to fish. Snake worshippers. +Witch doctors. The bad god Baigona. Peculiar ideas +of right and wrong among the natives. The survey of the +southern part of the island. Triangulation from the +mast of a ship.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><span class="smcap">Sutoto and the Chief's Daughter</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_137">Page 137</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto's love affair. Cinda, the Chief's daughter. The +Chief is told of the wonders of Wonder Island. About the +activities of the natives on that island. His curiosity. +John tells him how the white people live. The acute +questionings of the Chief. Teaching him how trade and +commerce is carried on. Money and its uses. How it +gets its value. Why it is a measure only. The trip to +the north in charge of the Chief's son. Gruesome tales +of the ferocity of the convicts. John still anxious to +find some particular cave. His chart. The unsolved +mystery of the boat. The clothing of the natives. +Bracelets. Glitter to attract natives. Weaving, the +only industry. The aptness of native women to adopt +fancy articles of dress and ornament. John's scheme, +anticipating the wedding of Sutoto and Cinda. A +"State affair." The mission to the Professor. Sending +the <i>Pioneer</i> to Wonder Island. Stut captain of the ship. +Sutoto's secret mission through Stut.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><span class="smcap">The Skeleton Beneath the Boat</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_148">Page 148</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>How the present journey reminded the boys of their first +adventure on Wonder Island. Peculiar animals. The +kagu. The fashionable millinery styles. Singular habit +of the bird. The benne plant. Its remarkable properties. +Lard from trees. The coffee trees. A tree with +sandpaper leaves. The indicus. Analyzing soils. How +plants digest food. Larvæ. The early forms of many +animals. Kinds of food in the earth. The bruang. +The sun-bear of Malay. The bear and the honey pot. +How it was tamed. The sport. The ocean. George and +Harry at the beach. Bathing in the surf. The discovery +of the wreck of an upturned boat. Finding the compartments +belonging to their lost boat on Wonder +Island. Sending for John. The skeleton beneath the +upturned boat. The bound skeleton. The startling discovery +of the same kinds of ropes found in their lost +boat. Evidence of a crime.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><span class="smcap">A Convict Colony of Natives</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_161">Page 161</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Describing the skeleton. A soldier or an adventurer. +Their first hatchet. The narrow neck of land. The Rose +of Jericho. The resurrection plant. The Australian +kangaroo. The exiled people. The Chief's son tells about +them. Explains they do not believe in killing except in +self-defense. The upas tree. Its flowering branch. Valuable +mineral in the hills. Description of the convict's +home. Banishment one of the most serious forms of +punishment for crimes. The survey of the mountains. +Hunting for caves. How the parties, were organized. +The influence of odors on human actions. Tests of odors +on patients. How they affect dreams. Calcareous formations. +Where the real caves are found. Erosive action +of water on limestone.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XIV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><span class="smcap">A White Paralytic in the Convict Colony</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_174">Page 174</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The wide search for the caves. George finds a cave +entrance. Preparing to explore the cave. The lamps. +A blind lead. A fissure, not an erosion. The joke on +George. The first sight of the location of the dreaded +criminal colony. The magnificent wild fruits. The +beautiful flowers. The first criminals. The industry of +the people. Cultivating fruit and vegetables. Hutoton. +Peculiarity in names. Well-dressed natives. The distinguished +head of the village. His dignity. The welcome +to the village. The well-kept huts. The garden +plots and bowers of flowers. The criminals preparing a +feast of welcome. The boys discover a white man. A +paralytic patient. How the convicts cared for him. Surprised +to learn that the convicts rewarded the men who +rescued the paralytic. How the savages calculated time. +The movement of the sun, and how it gave them the time.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><span class="smcap">Savage Marriage Customs</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_185">Page 185</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Criminal Colonies. The effects on the people. Its advantages. +The principles of punishment. Protecting society. +Isolating patients who have contagious or infectious +diseases. Trying to ascertain the identity of the +paralytic. John's promise to reward the people for the +care bestowed on the white man. Refusing to be paid, +for taking care of him. Contrasting Hutoton with Sasite, +the home of the Chief. Returning to Sasite. The first +glimpse of the returning <i>Pioneer</i>. The interesting party +aboard. The Chief and the entire village at the seashore. +The Professor. Muro's wife. Blakely. The Chief meets +the Professor. The Chief knows why the Professor is a +wise man. The double eyes, spectacles. The Chief with +the spectacles. Muro's wife meets the Chief's wife. They +confer about Cinda and Sutoto. The savage customs in +marriage. The ceremonies. Stut tells the boys about +Sutoto's mission to procure his wedding outfit. The surprising +news that Sutoto and Cinda were to be secretly +married that night. The plot. Muro's wife informed.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><span class="smcap">Sutoto and Cinda's Marriage; and the Surprise</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_193">Page 193</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief's wife gets the news. The Chief brought into +the conference. His will the only law on the matter of +marriage. He consents to their plan. The two requirements +in the ceremony of marriage according to their +rites. The gift of fruit, of fowl, and of game. The +blindfolding of the bridegroom. The absolute silence +when eating. Preparation for the banquet that night. +Sutoto and Cinda arrange to be married that night while +the people are at the banquet. Decide to conform strictly +to the rites of the tribe. The boys learn of the stealthy +plans. Witness the ceremony in Cinda's home. The +Chief arrests the bridal couple and takes them aboard the +ship. The criminals before the Chief. The Chief upbraids +Sutoto. The reconciliation. The presents brought +over from Wonder Island. Grief of the boys because +they had forgotten a present. The surprise of the natives +at the beautiful silver forks. Spices. Coffee. +Cream and sugar. Curiosity about the cows. The great +surprise to Sutoto. He is made Chief of his tribe. Monuments. +The presents. The great mirror, the present +of the boys. The crowns. The final ceremony. The +dance. Originally a religious ceremony. The encircling +wreath.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><span class="smcap">Hutoton; the Place of Death</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_207">Page 207</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Preparations for further explorations. Consulting the +charts. Determine to sail northward, on way to Wonder +Island. Reasons from shape of the island why an island +might be to the north. Geological formations. Upheavals. +Islands mere ridges. Sutoto to return to +Wonder Island. The Chief agrees to go to Wonder Island. +His family to accompany him. Proposed visit to Hutoton. +Boarding the ship. The welcome of the convicts. Taking +the paralytic to the ship. Stores from the ships for +the convict colony. The <i>Pioneer</i> sails to the north. Discovery +of a new island. Taking observations from the +sun. The calendar. Summer and winter. Taking the +angle of the sun, and what it means. Triangulation. +The nautical chart. Greenwich or Standard time. The +island which they had left named <i>Venture</i>. The new +island and its magnificent vegetation. John, with the +boys and two boatloads, land. The exploring parties +formed. The boys and Muro at the head of one party. +Traces of savages. Appearances that cannibals were +there. A shower of arrows their first surprise. The +volley and the disappearance of the natives. Reappearance +of the savages. Surrounded. Preparing for defense. +The second attack. The fight. The natives apparently +preparing to rush them.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><span class="smcap">Discovery of a New Island, and a Savage Tribe</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_222">Page 222</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The effect of the second volley. The determination of the +attacking party. The fire on all sides. The ammunition +getting low. The relief party under John. Hearing the +sounds of firing. The surprise of the natives. The savages +repulsed. Muro and the men follow the fleeing +natives. Recalled by John. Aiding the wounded. Taking +along a wounded Chief. The litter. The decoy. Returning +to the ship. Observing the enemy from a tree-top. +Following up the party. A rear guard. The runner +reports the determination of the natives to follow. +The signal shots to the ship. Reinforcements. The determination +to explore the island and meet the natives. +John with the boys and a strong party remain. The +<i>Pioneer</i> sails for Wonder Island. Holding a council.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XIX.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><span class="smcap">Fight with Natives and Return to Wonder Island</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_231">Page 231</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Arrangements for the <i>Pioneer</i> to return. Ammunition +needed. The arrangement of the men for scouting and +picketing. Leaving security harbor. A plant which devours +insects. Venus's fly-trap. How plants absorb +food. Irritability. How the leaf digests the fly. Food +absorbed by leaves as well as by roots. A cache of +human skulls. Head hunters. The vele. A hoodoo. +The rattle. The vele and the bamboo box. How it is +worked to produce the charm. Evidences of extreme +superstitions. Witch doctors. Peculiar noises. Doleful +sounds. Speculating on the mysteries of the island. +</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + +<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations"> +<col style="width:75%;" /> +<col style="width:25%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">He turned it over and examined every portion</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-075">75</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">The rites were progressing very satisfactorily</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-195">195</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-218">218</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="pr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 1. The Mysterious Message.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig1">28</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 2. The Walter Letter.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig2">40</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 3. The Fire-fly.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig3">57</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig4">60</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig4">76</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 6. The Second Limb.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig6">78</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 7. Triangulation from a Vessel.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig7">80</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 8. The Kagu.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig8">109</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig9">119</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig10">152</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig11">155</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig12">163</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 13. The Koala.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig13">164</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig14">167</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig15">212</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left">Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig16">234</a></td></tr> +</tbody> +</table> + +</div> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15">p. 15</a></span></p> +<h2>ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS</h2> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">"I am</span> awfully anxious to know where the charted +islands can be that John spoke about," remarked +George, as Harry was consulting the plans of the +boat they were building.</p> + +<p>"They must be in this section of the southern seas, +or his party wouldn't have sailed in this direction," +answered Harry, after a pause.</p> + +<p>"Do you think he would be offended if we spoke to +him about it!"</p> + +<p>"No;" answered Harry, after some reflection. +"He has spoken to me about it several times. But +why do you ask!"</p> + +<p>"For the reason that I think it would be a grand +thing to hunt them up."</p> + +<p>Harry laughed, and then slowly said: "That +would be a big thing to undertake. But what about +going home?"</p> + +<p>"I hadn't forgotten that. I meant that when we +came back it would be proper for us to undertake."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16">p. 16</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, haven't you had enough trouble during the +past two years?" And Harry laughed, just as +though they hadn't gone through sufficient trials to +last a life time.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't mind going through the same experiences, +when I remember what we have learned +and what all of us have accomplished," responded +George, as he looked through the window, reflectively, +and watched the natives at work.</p> + +<hr class="sorta" /> + +<p>It will be difficult to understand the force of the +above conversation, unless the reader knows the +situation in which the boys were placed at the time +it took place, and the locality of the scene where the +conversation was held.</p> + +<p>Over two years previously two boys, George Mayfield +and Harry Crandall, were members of a school +training ship which left the Harbor of New York, +for a cruise in southern waters, the object being to +instruct the crew of seventy boys in the art of seamanship, +as well as to give them a foundation knowledge +in the arts and sciences.</p> + +<p>On board they became intimate with a gray-haired +Professor, who became very ill. They were particularly +attracted to him, and waited upon him, until +they reached the Pacific Ocean, where, for some reason +the ship met a catastrophe, and the crew were +compelled to take to open boats.</p> + +<p>The two boys, with several companions, and the +Professor, were together in one of the life boats, +and after leaving the sinking ship a terrific gale,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17">p. 17</a></span> +one of the great monsoons, separated them from the +companion boats, and for six days they were driven +about in the vast ocean, absolutely helpless. During +this time all their young companions were washed +overboard, and they were driven to the point of despair, +when they were cast ashore on an island.</p> + +<p>They were thus placed on an unknown land, with +nothing but their scanty clothing, and devoid even +of a knife. There is no indication that the land was +inhabited, and for the first three months, while recuperating, +they had no opportunity to go far from +the spot where they landed.</p> + +<p>After the Professor had regained his health, they +began to make a few necessary things, and hunt for +the food which was necessary to preserve life. As +they grew bolder, however, they fashioned crude implements, +like bows and arrows, and primitive articles +of utility.</p> + +<p>They made a few trips into the interior, and then +saw the first indications which pointed to the presence +of inhabitants. From some of the traces it was +evident that the people must be savages, and then +they saw the necessity of preparing themselves to +meet hostile neighbors.</p> + +<p>Then began the most remarkable series of adventures +on the part of the boys, under the instruction +of the Professor, to provide not only the necessaries +of life, but many of the luxuries. While engaged +in the different enterprises they undertook +numerous excursions, all of which confirmed them +in the first intimations that they had landed on an<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18">p. 18</a></span> +island, and that it contained one or more savage +tribes.</p> + +<p>To recount all that the boys did, even in the briefest +space, would be impossible in this book, and it is +not necessary, in order to relate the happenings +from this time on; but some things are necessary, +because we shall have to deal with incidents which +took place during their adventures, and this volume +also brings into the scene several characters, in addition +to the three which have been named, as the +principal participants.</p> + +<p>The incidents referred to were called by the boys +"the mysteries." When they landed on the island +they erected a flag pole, and improvised a flag which +was kept at half mast, and mounted on a high point, +so that it would attract passing ships, if their island +chanced to be in the path of vessels. During one of +their excursions the flag pole and staff disappeared.</p> + +<p>For the purpose of making one of the trips by +water a boat was built, and they sailed it up a large +stream, only to find that within ten miles of their +home was an immense cataract, or falls, around +which they could not porter the vessel. It was left +below the falls in a secure position, and ten days +later, when they went for it, were surprised at its +disappearance.</p> + +<p>Later on it was found miles away, but the little +closets which they had built in to hold their food and +clothing, had disappeared, and they were still more +startled to find a pair of oars, which they could not +have made, attached to the boat.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19">p. 19</a></span></p> + +<p>In repairing the boat a note was discovered, written +by some one who could not have been a member +of their ill-fated vessel. This added to their perplexities, +for it indicated that white people had been +on the island, as well as savages.</p> + +<p>Then they found strange ropes, evidently fashioned +by a crude hand; a skull of a well-developed +man was picked up on the shore not far from their +home; part of the wreckage of a vessel was discovered; +a herd of yaks was captured and a mysterious +brand deciphered on one of them.</p> + +<p>But in their wanderings they found the entrance +to a cavern, and this was explored, resulting in finding +that it was formerly a pirates' lair, and they +were astounded at finding immense wealth in its +hidden recesses.</p> + +<p>They industriously searched the island, and found +numerous ores which were dug out and smelted and +from which they were able to build many things that +added to their comfort; and finally, firearms were +constructed, and powder made.</p> + +<p>They spent much of the time in chemical experiments, +in hunting for and gathering the different +vegetables, and fibres, and from the latter learned +how to weave cloth, to make felt, and to turn skins +into leather from the animals which they hunted.</p> + +<p>Their adventures were not wholly devoid of the +amusing things of life. In one of the expeditions +they captured a young Orang-outang. This was +carefully taught to do many things, and it became not +only a valuable assistant, and a wonderful scout in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20">p. 20</a></span> +their wanderings, but it afforded them immense +amusement, which was appreciated by the boys.</p> + +<p>And now, having been provided with suitable +weapons, they determined to go on voyages of discovery, +being prompted in this course, because they +found in the wreckage along one of the rivers, and +far in the interior, a life boat which was a companion +to their own which had been lost when they were +stranded in the great tempest.</p> + +<p>It was evident to them that some of their companions +were on the island, and probably, captives. +This made the quest a most exciting one, so every +energy was bent toward the end of helping the unfortunates.</p> + +<p>On the initial expedition, after the completion of +the first weapons, they came into contact with several +tribes of savages, one of whom was captured, after +being wounded. It developed that he was a chief of +one of the tribes which at that time were at war with +each other.</p> + +<p>Returning from this trip they discovered at their +home a distinguished looking white man in rags, +totally devoid of intellect, and unable to speak. It +was evident that he had met with some accident, but +he was entirely harmless, and obediently took up +and performed every sort of manual labor,—in fact, +was an expert in any sort of mechanical operation +required of him.</p> + +<p>In hunting, or in scouting, he was a perfect specimen +of the hunter, or the soldier. It seemed to be +an instinct with him to render every kind of service<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21">p. 21</a></span> +that might be needed, with the gun, or the tools which +were all about him. In the absence of a better name +they christened him John.</p> + +<p>On the second trip into the unknown portions of +the island they met three of the savage tribes, with +whom they had several battles, and one of the natives +was wounded and captured. While wandering +through the forests, in their efforts to return to their +home, they ran into a savage village, where they were +successful in rescuing two boys who had been shipmates +on the <i>Investigator</i> which went down months +before.</p> + +<p>While this was a source of joy it was clouded by +the information that they were not the ones who came +to the island in the life boat that the boys had found +in the river. This was evidence that others must +still be in the island, and probably held as captives.</p> + +<p>Some months after the silent John came to them, +his reason and the ability to speak returned to him, +and he told a wonderful tale of his wanderings, and +that which impressed the boys most was the information +that he had shipped in a vessel which was designed +to search out the treasures hidden in the +islands of the South seas.</p> + +<p>From hints which he dropped from time to time, +the islands containing the treasure were charted, +and later on, one of the caves so charted was found +on the island they now occupied, although they also +found several which were not alluded to and could +not be recognized by the description, according to +the story told by John.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22">p. 22</a></span></p> + +<p>John was an educated man, an archæologist, and, +next to the Professor, had the most varied knowledge +of any one the boys ever met, and it can be understood, +that their association with men of that class +made them remarkably active in seeking out and understanding +the wonderful things that nature presents +in every field of human activity.</p> + +<p>In order to be as brief as possible with this part of +the story, it is necessary to add that the rescue of +the two boys, and the restoration of John's faculties, +made a strong party, and new weapons were made, +and the real expeditions through the island begun.</p> + +<p>During the first extended trip, the Professor was +captured. Out of this misadventure grew some of +the most remarkable series of events, but finally, they +were successful in rescuing four more of their former +companions, and two of John's shipwrecked companions.</p> + +<p>The capture of the Chief, formerly alluded to, and +the subsequent rescue of a chief who was about to be +offered up as a sacrifice, served as a means to bring +two of the tribes to the rescue of those in the expedition, +and the Professor, by his wisdom, was able +to enlist the services of the tribe which had captured +him.</p> + +<p>The events which lead directly up to the beginning +of this volume were brought about by the enmity of +two of the most bitter and vindictive tribes, which +compelled the Professor and the boys to form an +expedition against those hostiles, in which four other +tribes assisted.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23">p. 23</a></span></p> + +<p>They captured the Chief, and rescued two of their +former companions, and then built a town called +Unity, where the advantages of civilization were +taught the natives, and to which place many of the +families of the natives emigrated.</p> + +<p>All the chiefs formed an alliance of peace, and the +Professor was made the chief magistrate. After +peace and order had been restored, the boys again +began to long for home. Prior to this they had determined +to build a ship large enough to take them to +the nearest shipping point, and they were now feverishly +engaged in the work with the aid of the natives, +who were eager to learn how the white men built the +wonderful things which they saw all about them.</p> + +<p>It will, therefore, be understood, that the remarks +of George, at the opening of this chapter, had reference +to the fact that the most important of the +islands, or the ones having the most of the treasures +could not be the one on which they resided, but pertained +to some other localities.</p> + +<p>"Well, if there is anything I am interested in, it +is to know why the wonderful buildings we found at +the Illyas' village were put up at that place, and what +caused all trace of them to be lost," said Harry, after +George had expressed his last opinion.</p> + +<p>"Do you remember what John said, after we came +out of the cave below the village?"</p> + +<p>"No; what was it!"</p> + +<p>"He said the copper in the cave might explain it."</p> + +<p>After the capture of the last tribe, John demanded +that the Chief inform them of the location of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24">p. 24</a></span> +Hoodoo, or Medicine Men of the tribe, and he reluctantly +consented, but the Chief warned them, that to +attempt to enter the cave would mean Death.</p> + +<p>John knew that the Chief and the people believed +the death tales told by the Medicine Men, as it was +tales of this kind which enabled them to maintain +such a hold on the people. In order to destroy the +power of those people, who really had been the cause +of much of their troubles, John announced that he +would take the Chief and his followers to the cave, +and that he would then go into the cave alone, and +come out again, to prove that the Medicine Men had +lied to him.</p> + +<p>John entered the cave, and single-handed captured +the Krishnos, as they were called, and brought them +out, thus verifying his statement that those men had +deceived the people. Soon thereafter John and the +boys entered the cave, which, from the description he +had, contained an immense amount of treasure, but +they were unable to discover any trace of it if it +existed.</p> + +<p>By accident the calcareous deposit was broken off +at one part in their search, and below was found a +dark material, which, after examination, was found +to be copper. It was not in its native state, but was +a product produced by smelting the ore, and they uncovered +an immense quantity of it, sufficient to show +that the portion of the cave in which it was found +was really a storehouse.</p> + +<p>Not more than a mile away was the Native village, +where they held the tribe captive. The village was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25">p. 25</a></span> +absolutely unlike anything else in the form of habitations +found in the island. Three of the buildings +were large structures, built in three of the well-known +types of architecture, and the other parts of the village +were laid off regularly.</p> + +<p>Surrounding the village was a strong embankment, +as though originally used as a fortification, and the +village itself was located on the side of a hill, betokening +sanitary considerations.</p> + +<p>"But I do not see," observed George, "what the +copper in the cave had to do with the town?"</p> + +<p>"Nor do I," responded Harry. "Suppose we see +John at the first opportunity. There are other +things besides the copper I would like to know. John +has asked every one that he has come into contact +with about the different wrecks that have come +ashore within the past two years, and no one seems +to have any idea that more than two of the <i>Investigator's</i> +boats came ashore."</p> + +<p>"Well, if they did it isn't at all likely that they +could come to the southern shore, when the wrecked +vessel was to the north of the island."</p> + +<p>"It is just for that reason," responded George, +"that I believe we shall find other islands in the +vicinity, and who knows but some of the boats +reached those islands?"</p> + +<p>"I am with you," said Harry. "Shall we talk to +John about it?"</p> + +<p>"By all means. But stop! Why not have a talk +with the Professor first?"</p> + +<p>"Good idea. We owe everything to him."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26">p. 26</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> town of Unity was located about ten miles +from the sea, on a little stream, which had a waterfall, +from which they derived the power for turning +the machinery which had been put up. This consisted +of a saw mill, a small foundry, a machine shop, +as well as grist mill and other mechanism suitable for +a town.</p> + +<p>All these enterprises were now being operated by +the natives. The leading commercial genius of the +town was Blakely, who was one of the owners of the +vessel on which John had sailed from San Francisco, +and which was also wrecked by the same monsoon +which sent the schoolship <i>Investigator</i> to the bottom.</p> + +<p>It was Blakely's idea that the work of the natives +could be profitably turned to raising coffee, cocoa, +and the different fibres which naturally grew all over +the island, and in order to take advantage of the +crops which could be grown there it would be necessary +to open communication with the outside world.</p> + +<p>To do this meant that they must build a ship, and +thus reach civilization, and vessels could then bring +such things to the islands as the natives could use, +and take away the produce that the natives could +turn out.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27">p. 27</a></span></p> + +<p>Such a plan was one which was heartily seconded +by all the boys, who, although they had been engaged +in the most wonderful experiences, were homesick, +and longed to see their parents in the States, and +thus relieve them of their anxiety, after an absence +of more than two years.</p> + +<p>It was with a will that all took a hand in the work, +and the ship was nearing completion. They had no +facilities for making a large engine, so the vessel was +a sailer, with a small propeller, and the largest size +engine they could turn out was to be used as an +auxiliary.</p> + +<p>The next evening while the Professor, John and the +boys were together, Harry brought up the subject of +the talk of the previous evening.</p> + +<p>"George and I have been talking about making a +voyage of discovery."</p> + +<p>The Professor looked at Harry with that genial +smile which the boys had learned to love. Without +answering for the moment, the old man turned to +John, as the latter's face lit up.</p> + +<p>"I thought you boys were homesick?" he said.</p> + +<p>"Well, yes," answered George. "But only for a +little while."</p> + +<p>"Only homesick for a little while?" and the Professor's +hearty laugh followed.</p> + +<p>"I mean we are homesick,—that is, we can be +cured of it in a little while."</p> + +<p>Without relaxing that broad smile, the Professor +continued: "I suppose you want to be cured before +you go on the voyage of discovery? Is that it?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28">p. 28</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"But what do you expect to discover!" asked +John, gravely.</p> + +<p>"Just what you suggested on one occasion," said +Harry.</p> + +<p>"We want to know where the treasures are on the +islands," remarked George.</p> + +<p>"Then, there is another thing," ventured Harry. +"I don't think all the boats of our ship were lost, and +it is likely that they found refuge on some other +island."</p> + +<p>"But how do you know there are other islands +near here?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't know, only from what John has +said."</p> + +<p>John looked at Harry for a moment quizzically, +and then said: "When did I say so?" he asked with +a smile.</p> + +<p>"When you told about the charts of the treasure +caves."</p> + +<p>"But we have found them, haven't we?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but not all of them."</p> + +<p>"That is true; and your argument is correct. Unquestionably, +there are other islands, probably not +in the immediate vicinity, but near enough that they +could have caught some of the boats. I quite agree +with you that we ought to make the attempt. The +Professor and I have just been talking of taking up +the matter in order to relieve any who might have +been so unfortunate as to be east away."</p> + +<p>"I am surprised," said the Professor, "that you<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29">p. 29</a></span> +are not through with treasure hunting, and want +some more of it."</p> + +<p>"But you know, Professor, that some of the most +interesting times we had were during the investigations +we made at the big cave at the Cataract on +Wonder Island!"</p> + +<p>"Quite true; but think of the immense riches you +now have. In the vault beneath the floor of the main +shop you have the combined treasure of the two +caves," continued the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and that shall be taken back by you to your +homes in the States, and you will want to enjoy it," +and John said this with a most sincere air, as he +looked at the boys.</p> + +<p>"That would be nice," said Harry reflectively. +"But if we are there the only thing we can do is to +spend it, and there is no particular fun in doing +that."</p> + +<p>"What? No fun in spending the money?" exclaimed +the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Why, we haven't spent a cent since we have been +here, and we have enjoyed every hour of the time, +except—except—" and George hung his head for a +moment.</p> + +<p>"I know," said the dear old Professor; "I know +what you mean. Home still has a warm place in +your heart. That is right. You must see your +home, and then,—"</p> + +<p>"Then we want to come back," broke in Harry.</p> + +<p>"It makes me happy to see that the lessons of the +past while we have been together has impressed on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30">p. 30</a></span> +your minds one thing; that it is not riches which give +happiness."</p> + +<p>"I know that," said Harry. "When I go out and +see these poor people here, and I meet smiles on +every face, and a welcome everywhere, the thought +that we have tried to make them feel and know that +wars were wrong, and that true happiness consists in +trying to make others happy, it gives me more +pleasure than all the gold which we took from the +caves of the Buccaneers."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and there is another thing, that I have been +thinking about," said George. "I really don't think +the people here are so bad, and never have thought +so."</p> + +<p>"Well, they have been doing some pretty bad +things," remarked John. "I would like to know +what makes you think as you do."</p> + +<p>"I mean, that if it wasn't for certain classes, like +the Krishnos, say, the people would not be trying to +sacrifice each other. Those fellows are the ones who +lie to the people, just as the fellows at the last cave +told the people and the Chiefs that if they went into +the cave the Great Spirit would destroy them."</p> + +<p>John and the Professor both laughed, while the +boys looked on. There did not seem to be anything +amusing about that, and they wondered why they +should laugh at George's remark.</p> + +<p>"Did it ever occur to you how like that is to the +white man's way of doing things?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"I never thought of that!" said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Do the white people act that way, too?" inquired<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31">p. 31</a></span> +George. "I never knew that we had people who +tried to deceive others so they could give them up as +a sacrifice?"</p> + +<p>"What do you think the Krishnos deceive the +people for?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"So as to give them the power," answered George.</p> + +<p>"Quite true. But what is the object of that +power?"</p> + +<p>"So they can rule?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but what gives them the power to rule?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I see now! They get paid for it! And +that is why the Krishnos have all the best things, and +are better cared for than even the chiefs are?"</p> + +<p>"You have given the right answer. The Krishnos +don't want to sacrifice human life because they love +to do it, but because in the doing of it they inspire +fear, and through fear they can get what they want."</p> + +<p>"But, Professor, you haven't yet told us how that +is like the white people do it."</p> + +<p>"In exactly the same way. The Krishnos own the +big gun factories, and they tell the chiefs that the +people across the river, or on the other side of the +mountain are going to rise up against them, and they +must arm the people and attack them. You see the +white man's Krishnos have a great cave, called a gun +factory, and while he does not want to offer up any +sacrifices for the love of it, he does so because it is +his business to make guns, and ammunition, and +shells which explode with terrific force, and destroy +hundreds at every shot."</p> + +<p>"Well, after all, we are not much better than the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32">p. 32</a></span> +savages here, are we?" said Harry, as he looked +around, with a sad expression.</p> + +<p>"We have advanced a little beyond them," interpolated +John. "We have tried to systematize the +killing. The savage goes at it without regard. But +the white man has set rules to conduct the slaughter. +Of course, the rules do not say that they shall not kill +but it does point out the impolite ways of killing."</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled at this homely way of putting +it, but the boys looked doubtfully at John's exposition, +and then George ventured to remark: "I +can see the force of it, and it is my opinion that the +savage way is, after all, the most reasonable."</p> + +<p>"If it is not the most reasonable," answered the +Professor, "it is certainly the most logical. But we +are getting away from our subject. I understand +from what John says that within the next week we +shall be able to launch the vessel!"</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Harry. "Everything is now so +far ahead that in two weeks more we can be ready +to sail."</p> + +<p>"That is well. I hear there is considerable rivalry +among the men to go with you?"</p> + +<p>"But aren't you going with us?" asked George in +a voice of alarm.</p> + +<p>"No; my place is here. I have no desire to go +back. I have induced John, much against his will, I +know, to go with you, but I cannot leave my people +here. I will welcome you only the more gladly when +you return."</p> + +<p>Harry was almost in tears, as he said: "But we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33">p. 33</a></span> +wanted you to go back with us so we could take you to +our homes and let our people see you. They would +be so happy to see you and to hear you talk."</p> + +<p>"Thank you so much for the kind invitation. +Sometime in the future, when everything is properly +settled here, and I can see my way clear, I will consider +it an honor to visit your homes, and enjoy the +friendship of your dear ones; but not now."</p> + +<p>The door opened quietly, and Angel stepped in, +Angel being the Orang-outang to which we have alluded. +He was now nearly as tall as George. He +gravely shambled over to the Professor, and placed +an envelope in his hand.</p> + +<p>Angel was the most wonderful character in that +community. He was the pet and the playmate of +all the children. No one dared to harm him or offer +an insult. Such a thing would have caused an +insurrection in that town.</p> + +<p>While he could not speak, he could understand +practically everything that was told him. Daily he +performed many extraordinary tasks, thanks to the +training and care that George had bestowed upon +him from the day he had become a captive.</p> + +<p>The Professor opened the envelope, and adjusted +his glasses. As he read his eyes opened wider and +wider, while John and the boys drew closer. While +reading one of the sheets the Professor was slowly +unfolding a scrap of dark colored material, smaller +than the sheet he was reading.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"The letter is from Blakely," he said as he passed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34">p. 34</a></span> +the papers to John. "And what do you think it is +about?"</p> + +<p>All eagerly peered at the letter and then at the +brown missive, whatever it was.</p> + +<p>"Read it aloud," said the Professor.</p> + +<p>John handed it to George, and this is Blakely's letter:</p> + +<p> +"<span class="smcap">South Mountain</span>,<br /> +Below Illya.<br /> +<br /> +"My Dear Professor:<br /> +</p> + +<p>"I felt sure that my view as to the character of +the mountain range below the town was correct. +Copper outcroppings were found as far south as the +range can be seen, and there is also silver in abundance. +This will surely be a profitable field for the +natives. Yesterday, while prospecting on the southeastern +side of the main ridge, I was surprised to +find a part of a metal pot, evidently of cast iron. +Quite a number of articles, of no particular value +were lying near, but within the fragment of the pot, +and protected by a shale of rock, was the enclosed +scrap, which I thought might interest you, as you +have a leaning in the direction of finding out hidden +and abstruse things. Probably, you can decipher +what it says. All the men are well, and are feeling +jolly. We may be ready to return in a week. I +hope the old ship is coming along all right.</p> + +<p> +"Hurriedly, as ever,</p> +<p>"<span class="smcap">Blakely.</span>"<br /> +</p> + +<p>"That is satisfactory. Blakely is the right man +for his job," remarked John.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35">p. 35</a></span></p> + +<p>"Now, let us see what the scrap has to say," said +the Professor.</p> + +<p>John held the scrap up to the light, and all peered +at it. "I think there are cross lines on it, although +I am not quite sure," he said, as he again held it up +so the light could flash through it.</p> + +<p>"What difference would that make whether it had +or it hadn't cross lines?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Simply this: I wanted to satisfy myself whether +or not it was taken from a ship's pad, which is generally +ruled both ways."</p> + +<p>"What is the object of having paper ruled both +ways?"</p> + +<p>"It is a convenient way of making calculations +where measurements are necessary, as is the case +in figuring out and placing the different celestial +marks which guide the sailors. I think this is a +marine pad. Now, let us see what it contains, before +we go further."</p> + +<p>"See the name signed at the bottom," cried out +George. "W-a-l-t. That must be a 't'. But the +rest is blurred."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if that isn't Walter?" said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Who is Walter?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Walter? Why he is the man who signed the +note we found on the <i>Investigator's</i> life boat No. +3 and from whom we have never heard."</p> + +<p>"I remember now," said John, reflectively. "He +mentioned Wright who was one of my companions. +But I did not know Walter,—but what is this?" +All craned forward now. "Here is a line; it looks<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36">p. 36</a></span> +like a large V, pointing to the south;—that is if the +upper part of the paper is the north."</p> + +<p>"There is some sort of tracing on it," said George.</p> + +<p>"Your eyesight is good, George, see if you can see +any figures on the sheet that will explain the V, and +the reason for the name below."</p> + +<p>"There is the slightest sign of a figure, or a word +just below the point of the V. It looks like '30'. +This seems to be an arrow, which points to the right +diagonally."</p> + +<p>"Now you boys have something to occupy your +minds. Yon have been interested in the Walter note +for a year; now is the time to do some investigating."</p> + +<p>"I have an idea," said Harry, jumping up. +"Where can we find the original Walter's note? +We can compare the signature, and that will tell +whether it is Walter or not."</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled as he noticed the eagerness +of the boys. They rushed out of the room and went +over to the shop to reclaim the note that had given +them so much concern fourteen months before.</p> + +<p>When they had gone John said: "I presume you +have already guessed what the note contains?"</p> + +<p>"Unquestionably it has reference to the location of +the main ledge of copper or other ore which is measured +from some point in that vicinity, and which may +be determined later on by noting the place where the +missive was found, or from some natural landmark."</p> + +<p>"That is my view, but I felt it would be better for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37">p. 37</a></span> +the boys to dig it out for themselves," replied John.</p> + +<p>The wonderful nature of the instruction which the +boys had obtained during their stay on the island, +was characterized by this little incident. Everything +learned by one's own exertions is not only more valuable +because of that fact, but the facts thus gleaned +will leave a stronger impress upon the mind.</p> + +<p>The boys thus learned by doing things themselves, +that they became strong and self reliant, and it made +them happy to think that they were able to pick up +the threads, however tangled, and weave them into +a harmonious whole. It is the secret of doing things +well.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38">p. 38</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>THE ARROW ON THE SHEET</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">When</span> the boys reached their rooms they set to +work to decipher the colored paper. It was about +four by six inches in size, and had been folded twice, +as the creases plainly showed. Assuring themselves +that it was paper which had been crossruled, as suggested +by John, they tried to decipher the straggling +letters and form them into some coherent form.</p> + +<p>The paper had the following appearance when they +received it:</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 373px;"> +<a id="illus-fig1" name="illus-fig1" /> +<a href="#p_38"> +<img src="images/illus-fig1-p038.png" width="373" height="221" +alt="Fig. 1. The Mysterious Message" title="Fig. 1. The Mysterious Message" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mysterious</span> <span class="u">Message</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The words, or parts of words "dire," in the first +line, and "30 gues" in the second line, together with<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39">p. 39</a></span> +the letters "Walt" are the only absolutely clear +things to be noticed.</p> + +<p>"The writing is right across the V-shaped marks, +and the arrow is plain enough. It may be though, +that the arrow has nothing to do with the V-shaped +mark." And George held the paper away from his +eyes to get the proper effect at a distance.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how close the mountain is to the sea?" +ventured Harry.</p> + +<p>"I don't see what difference that would make," +replied George. "That <i>30</i> must mean some measurement. +It is either feet, or miles, or yards, or,—"</p> + +<p>"Why can't you see that 'gues' is a part of the +word 'leagues.'"</p> + +<p>Harry jumped up as though shot. "Well, that +was stupid of us, sure enough."</p> + +<p>"With that key before us, we can make some headway. +I believe the V-shape is the lower end of the +mountain, probably a headland, and the arrow points +to a place 30 leagues to the,—see here, in the last line +is a W. and there is a blur before it and after it. +That may be SWE, EWS, SWW, SWS, and,—"</p> + +<p>"Don't go so fast," shrieked Harry. "What do +you suppose the capital I stands for at the beginning +of the third line?"</p> + +<p>"I—I—, why,—<i>Island</i>, of course," said George, +with an air of superiority. "But it cannot be west."</p> + +<p>"Well, the arrow points southeast."</p> + +<p>"How do you know?" asked George, dubiously.</p> + +<p>"Why, that word at the extreme top must be +'north,' and if so then the arrow is pointing south,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40">p. 40</a></span> +and the 'W' belongs to something in that direction."</p> + +<p>"There, in the second line is a word that looks +like 'land.' Can it be a part of the word 'Island'?"</p> + +<p>"It doesn't seem so, as there is too much space +before the letters. It seems to me though, that it +reads 'land 30 leagues' but what does 'se' mean?"</p> + +<p>The boys were up late that night, and they went +to bed with the missive still unsolved. Before retiring +Harry said: "Let us wait until daylight. +The sun may help us out."</p> + +<p>When they awoke the first thing that occurred to +George was the original Walter letter, so that the +writing could be compared. It was found, and +George came in with an exultant bound.</p> + +<p>"I am sure now that it was Walter. Here it is." +The original letter was as follows:</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 377px;"> +<a id="illus-fig2" name="illus-fig2" /> +<a href="#p_40"> +<img src="images/illus-fig2-p040.png" width="377" height="253" +alt="Fig. 2. Walter Letter. + +Go directly south from the large +river which flows to the east, +west of the mountains. We +are too closely watched to +escape. The tribe at war with +our captors are to the west +of. If I escape I will follow +the river to the sea so you +will understand where I am. + +Walter." title="Fig. 2. Walter Letter." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">Walter</span> <span class="u">Letter</span>.</span> +</div> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41">p. 41</a></span></p> + +<p>"Compare the two and you will see they look +alike," said George.</p> + +<p>"What shall we tell the Professor!" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Well but I am not yet through with the paper. +Suppose we moisten it, and that may bring out something +we didn't see before."</p> + +<p>This was done, but it made the entire document +worse than before.</p> + +<p>"Too bad we have spoiled it," remarked Harry, "but +I think we are safe in telling the Professor and John +what we have found out."</p> + +<p>For the time being, however, the boys had other +urgent work to do. The day for launching had been +set, and every working hour was valuable, so they +were over at the ship yard early, and the boys did +not see either John or the Professor during the +day.</p> + +<p>The vessel as designed by Harry, and supervised +by John, was ninety feet long, and had a beam of +eighteen feet, with a very deep keel, and high bulwarks. +It was constructed of a species of oak, found +in abundance in the forest west of the town, and was +cut up into boards, and dried in specially-prepared +kilns which were put up for the purpose.</p> + +<p>While lumber dried in this way is not the best for +ordinary uses, it will serve for shipping purposes, +because there is always more or less moisture present +in the hull of the vessel, and the object was to enable +them to get the material in the speediest way.</p> + +<p>The saw mill was one of their first experiments in +building machinery, and it was in constant service<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42">p. 42</a></span> +from the day it was first erected, getting out lumber +for building purposes.</p> + +<p>The engine was designed only for auxiliary purposes, +and the boiler was intended to use coal, of +which they found an ample supply in the northern +portion of the island, as explained in a previous +book.</p> + +<p>When the boys returned to their rooms late that +afternoon, the first thing that interested them was +the message. When it was brought in it was dry, +and a slight change was noticed in its appearance. +Now, what appeared to be the first word of the message, +was discernible, the word "Take," and the +word "Head" could be made out before and as a part +of "land," in the second line.</p> + +<p>"We have it," cried Harry, as he jumped up. +"Now let them know about it."</p> + +<p>They were across the open space, without any +ceremony, and without taking trouble to announce +themselves, were in the Professor's room.</p> + +<p>"We have it,—we have made it out," was the announcement, +as Harry held up the message.</p> + +<p>"Does it tell you where the Copper mine is located?" +asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Copper mine!" exclaimed George. "What has +a copper mine to do with it?"</p> + +<p>"John and I concluded, from certain markings on +the paper, that it contained a diagram of the mine!"</p> + +<p>"Well, you were mistaken," said Harry with a +chuckle. "It is something about an island, thirty +leagues to the southeast, somewhere."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43">p. 43</a></span></p> + +<p>"Is that so?" exclaimed the Professor in surprise. +"Get John. He will be surprised."</p> + +<p>John came hurriedly at the announcement, and +the contents of the missive pointed out. "This is +certainly good news," he said. "That was fine work +on your part."</p> + +<p>"You see the arrow, and the part of the word +'leagues.' That couldn't mean feet or yards, or +miles."</p> + +<p>"Quite evident," said John, as he mused for a +while. "This confirms, in a measure, the information +that we have as to the proximity of these islands, +but the charts show them farther away."</p> + +<p>"Undoubtedly, if Walter knew what he was talking +about, we have an interesting problem to decipher, +and the determination to make the voyage is a +wise and timely one," interposed the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Now for the ship," said Harry. "Every day is +a hundred, in my mind."</p> + +<p>As may be imagined, the boys now worked with +feverish haste. Other islands here, and waiting for +them! Sometimes they were almost tempted to give +up the trip home, but the Professor would not hear +of it.</p> + +<p>"Do not change your plans, if you have any good +conclusions when you start out. Don't oscillate from +one thing to another. Always make up your minds +and then take a wise, persistent course. It is that +which always serves you best."</p> + +<p>"No; we will go home first, and <i>then</i> for the islands," +said Harry, who felt relieved that the im<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44">p. 44</a></span>petuous +nature of George could be brought to their +way of thinking, although George was by far the +most homesick of the entire lot.</p> + +<p>All the boys were on hand when the vessel was +launched. It rode the water beautifully, and the +natives were the most enthusiastic helpers. They +felt proud of their work. Uraso and Muro, the two +chiefs, who were the most prominent men in the community, +and particularly Sutoto, the intelligent Beree, +and Stut, the brother-in-law of Muro, were on +hand.</p> + +<p>It was a great feast day for the people. Tears +actually flowed from the Professor's eyes, as he saw +the women and children crowd about him. He was +almost a God to them. They were accustomed to receive +visits from him in his weekly rounds, and how +at such times he loved to tell them how to make and +arrange things about the house, which contributed +to their comfort.</p> + +<p>Everybody was at work; all were happy, and no +one appreciated this more than the women, who had +been lifted out of the bonds of slavery and elevated +through the wise administration of the Professor.</p> + +<p>Angel, too, was in evidence. He was the first to +climb the mast, as the ship floated in the stream.</p> + +<p>"I wonder whether Angel remembers the first trip +he took with us on boat No. 1?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>Angel bestowed a knowing look on Harry. "I +believe he knows what you said," remarked George.</p> + +<p>In another week the rigging had been put up, and +the boiler and engine were installed before the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45">p. 45</a></span> +launching, so that the necessary work required to +enable the ship to sail, was the provisioning. John +suggested that what was of far more importance +would be the work of training a crew to handle the +ship, so they turned their minds toward the solution +of this question.</p> + +<p>The selection of a crew was a most difficult task, +because all the men were willing to volunteer. It +was decided, however, that only the unmarried men +should be taken, and this at once eliminated many +who might otherwise have been selected.</p> + +<p>For three days the ship was taken out to sea, under +sail only, and John found no trouble in maneuvering +the vessel with his new crew. John was a sailor, and +had once been owner of a vessel, so that they were in +competent hands.</p> + +<p>But the final day came, when they must go. It +was a most trying time for the poor boys. Almost +at the last moment, Harry and George walked back +to the Professor's room, and broke out into tears.</p> + +<p>"Everybody is leaving you," said Harry, "and I +cannot bear to go and leave you in this way."</p> + +<p>All the rescued boys were on board, as well as +Blakely, since the Professor had insisted that the +latter should go, for business reasons, so that the +Professor was left alone, the only white man on Wonder +Island, when the ship sailed down the river.</p> + +<p>True, there was no reason to fear for his safety. +The natives loved him too devotedly, but the boys +felt that he must often be lonely in his new surroundings, +with no one but the natives about him. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46">p. 46</a></span> +little knew that the solace and comfort of the grand +old man was the knowledge that he had helped his +fellow man, though the color of the skin was darker +than his own.</p> + +<hr class="sorta" /> + +<p>Their voyage was accompanied by favoring winds +and perfect weather. Valparaiso, Chile, was the +first port at which they landed, and as a trip around +the Horn, or even through the Straits of Magellan, +and up along the Atlantic coast, would mean several +months, with their own vessel, they shipped in one of +the line steamers, and within seven weeks they saw +Sandy Hook lightship, and then the forts which lined +the opposite shore at the Narrows.</p> + +<p>Telegrams to their parents created paroxysms of +joy in many homes which had been robbed when the +<i>Investigator</i> went down. There were no happier +homes than the ones Harry and George were welcomed +to.</p> + +<p>The papers told the stories of the boys in pages +and pages of descriptions, and they showed the +photos, and told what the boys had done in their temporary +home. The hero of all this wonderful home-coming +was Angel.</p> + +<p>The people, the houses, the wonderful automobiles +which he saw on every hand, at first alarmed him, +but when he saw that George did not seem a bit +afraid, he reconciled himself to the situation.</p> + +<p>His first automobile ride was a revelation to him. +He held on tightly to George, at first, but soon the +sensation became one of joy, and he could not get<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47">p. 47</a></span> +enough of it. The boys were certainly fêted, but +when they told their parents that they must go back, +the proposition met with strong opposition.</p> + +<p>The parents forgot that the boys were now over +two years older than when they went away, and it +seemed singular that the surroundings did not seem +the same to them as before the happy boyhood days +before they left home.</p> + +<p>For business reasons the parents knew that it +would be prudent to permit them to return and they +were influenced by the remarkable change they saw +in the manners and actions of the boys. They saw +the youths were strong and self reliant, ever ready +to act and to carry out their resolutions. These boys +had been transformed into men.</p> + +<p>They spent many days going over old scenes and +visiting friends. They enjoyed to the utmost the +reunion with their families, but they could not cease +talking about the Professor. They now realized in +full what he had been to them, and what his example +and teaching meant to them. There was really a +feeling amounting almost to jealousy on the part of +the people at home against the Professor, but it was +not one of bitterness.</p> + +<p>One who could exert such a healthy influence on +the lives of the young, as he possessed, was worthy +of the adulation that the boys bestowed. But John +was not forgotten in these periods of happiness.</p> + +<p>They were never happy when telling the tales of +their adventures except when John was present, and +the latter was the most sought-for individual, be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48">p. 48</a></span>cause +when he once began to tell some of his vivid +tales the people would not let him stop.</p> + +<p>Finally the time for departure came. A merry +party gathered upon the dock when the explorers +were about to depart. They would write at least +once a month, as Blakely had assured them that he +would arrange to have a steamer run a round trip +each four weeks, to take care of the commodities +which would be made up by the natives.</p> + +<p>The steamship <i>Panama</i> slowly moved out into the +bay, and the boys remembered the memorable event +which took place at that same dock thirty months +before. Then they left with a sort of half joy in +their hearts, and now they were going away to finish +up the great adventures which they had started when +they reached the island of Wonder.</p> + +<p>All hearts were anxious as the ship neared Valparaiso, +because there they would leave the liner +from New York, and again ship in the boat they had +built. They keenly scanned the pier as the vessel +was being warped in.</p> + +<p>"Ah! there is Blakely on the dock," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"But I don't see the <i>Pioneer</i> here!" responded +George.</p> + +<p><i>Pioneer</i> was the name of the vessel they had built, +and which brought them to that port from their island +home.</p> + +<p>The moment the vessel came alongside the dock, +George called to Blakely: "Where is our boat?"</p> + +<p>"At Wonder Island," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"At Wonder Island?" said Harry, and the boys<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49">p. 49</a></span> +looked at each other in amazement. And now they +must wait several weeks, probably, until it returns. +This was disappointing, indeed.</p> + +<p>The boys rushed off. "And where shall we go +now?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Over to our ship," replied Blakely.</p> + +<p>They followed his gaze to a dock beyond, where +lay a beautiful vessel, a steamer, all decked out with +flags.</p> + +<p>"Is that our vessel!"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I have been to Wonder Island on her +since you left. We just arrived two days ago. We +are ready to steam out within two hours."</p> + +<p>"Then don't let us waste a moment's time," said +Harry.</p> + +<p>"I thought you might want to take a look over the +town," said Blakely.</p> + +<p>"I have no wish to do so, as long as we have the +islands in view," remarked George. "And how is +the Professor," he continued in an eager tone.</p> + +<p>"He is well and happy. But I have no doubt he +longs for you, as he frequently goes over to your +rooms, and wanders around the shop, a thing which +he never did while you were there."</p> + +<p>This was joyful news to the boys. How they +longed to sail up Enterprise River. The steamer +which Blakely had bought, and which was destined to +ply between Wonder Island and the nearest trans-shipping +point, was called the <i>Wonder</i>, a thing which +the boys had not noticed until they were nearing the +vessel.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50">p. 50</a></span></p> + +<p>It was a saucy little steamer, and as they drew +near Blakely said: "What speed do you think she +will make?"</p> + +<p>"Fifteen miles at least," remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>"I am guaranteed eighteen miles an hour at the +least."</p> + +<p>"Isn't that fine," said George. "What does she +burn?"</p> + +<p>"Either wood, coal or petroleum."</p> + +<p>"Now would be the time to look up the oil deposits +on the island," remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>Within an hour the ship was under way, greatly to +the delight of the boys.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the ship was sent forward under +full steam, the speed was far too slow for the impatient +boys. They were on the bridge most of the +time with the Captain who had been employed to run +the vessel. He proved to be a jolly, red-faced tar, +who loved the antics of the boys.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51">p. 51</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was at the latter part of May when the <i>Wonder</i> +steamed up the broad river which led to the town of +Unity. When they were within two miles of the +town, where they could begin to see the beautiful +white houses in the distance, Blakely came up to the +bridge, and suggested that it would be time to give +the town a salute.</p> + +<p>The Captain gave the order and the great whistle +began to make a horrible din, and kept it up for a full +half mile. Long before the boat came into sight of +the dock itself the boys could see the people of the +town hurrying down to the wharf.</p> + +<p>When they saw the boys on the bridge pandemonium +was let loose.</p> + +<p>"This looks and acts just like a real American +town," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"See the Professor," said Harry, as he rushed to +the end of the bridge, and frantically waved his hat.</p> + +<p>The plank was swung and fastened, and the crew +of natives rushed off and met their friends, but +George and Harry were not permitted to walk down +the gang plank. The joy at seeing them again was +so intense that the people took them on their shoulders, +and the Professor had a hard time to get near +enough to grasp them and bid a welcome.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52">p. 52</a></span></p> + +<p>The people marveled at the boys. They were +dressed up in regulation American style, and the +Professor asked them if they had brought the "latest" +cuts to put in the show windows.</p> + +<p>Everybody followed, and the bantering and cheering +made a continuous performance for them until +they reached their home. All the chiefs were there, +dressed up for the occasion, and what delighted them +more than anything else was the fact that the Krishnos, +the former witch doctors of the tribes, and who +were now the teachers for the children, were the first +to offer congratulations on their return.</p> + +<p>There was no work in the town that day. Everybody +determined to celebrate, and it was with hearts +full of joy that the boys witnessed the demonstrations +in their behalf.</p> + +<p>"Isn't this a glorious home-coming?" said George. +"It was worth the trip here to witness it."</p> + +<p>"It does seem strange to call it a 'home-coming,' +but that is just what it is," answered Harry. "How +happy the people are. They seem to appreciate +everything that has been done for them, and it is such +a pleasure to do things for those who appreciate it."</p> + +<p>The stories which John brought to the Professor +were so beguiling that he promised the boys that he +would probably be able during the next year to make +a visit with them to their homes, and this delighted +them beyond measure.</p> + +<p>Although they had been absent four months, they +noted many improvements made during their absence. +The boys, on their own initiative, visited<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53">p. 53</a></span> +many of the homes, and talked to the people, and told +them of the visit home. And how those simple people +enjoyed this kindly act, and cherished it for +months afterwards.</p> + +<p>But it was now time to think seriously of the contemplated +voyage of discovery, which was ever uppermost +in the minds of the boys. While conversing +on the subject a few evenings after their return, +Harry remarked: "I suppose we must use the +<i>Pioneer</i> for our trip, as the <i>Wonder</i> will have to make +the regular trips?"</p> + +<p>"John and I think that would be the wisest plan. +The native sailors are now well adapted to handle +her, and do you know that Sutoto sailed her around +the island?"</p> + +<p>This was pleasing to the boys, who liked Sutoto.</p> + +<p>"And who are the others that went with him?"</p> + +<p>"Why Lolo was one of them, and Stut and Chump. +Oh, they had a jolly time; so they said, and I can +believe it, because they are simply crazy to make +another trip." And the Professor beamed as he +related many of the incidents which they told him of +their experiences.</p> + +<p>While they were talking, Sutoto appeared, and +was immediately admitted. After some talk, Sutoto +said: "The Professor said that when you returned +you would have some work for me with the <i>Pioneer</i>."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and you shall command her," said Harry.</p> + +<p>Sutoto could not but show his pleasure. "I knew +you would come back, but so many here said you +would not."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54">p. 54</a></span></p> + +<p>At this point Professor explained that there were +many rumors among the people to the effect that the +boys would never again come back, and all showed +grief at the news. I assured them that you were just +as anxious to return as they were to have you and I +then told Sutoto that I knew you had plans which +would require his services, but I thought it would be +more agreeable if you imparted the nature of it to +him.</p> + +<p>The boys were not slow to outline the plans to him, +but advised him to keep the information to himself, +which he promised to do. It was enough for him to +know that he would command the ship. It was this +that induced Sutoto to take out the ship, and finally +to circumnavigate the island, so as to try out the +sailors and properly to fit them for the work when +the boys returned.</p> + +<p>"Now that being settled, Sutoto, we are going to +leave the work of provisioning the <i>Pioneer</i> to you. +We must take a supply of guns and ammunition, as +well, and probably it would be wise to have a small +troop of the best soldiers," was Harry's instruction.</p> + +<p>"Uraso wants to go. I am sure he would be the +best one to take.</p> + +<p>"What will Muro say to that?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Oh, take him along, by all means," said George, +"because I want Lolo to go with us."</p> + +<p>It was then settled that they were to take a small +force, sufficient for immediate purposes, and if it was +found that the islands discovered were too well set<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55">p. 55</a></span>tled +with hostiles it would be an easy matter to remain +aloof, or return for reinforcements.</p> + +<p>While arrangements were being made for the departure +of the expedition Blakely informed the Professor +that it would be good policy to make up part +of the cargo of the <i>Wonder</i> with copper, and that +both vessels could proceed to the southeastern part +of the island, and the men aboard could be used to +transport the copper to the sea.</p> + +<p>In this way the expedition would serve a double +purpose. No one attempted to go contrary to the +wishes of Blakely on matters which touched upon the +commercial ventures in which they were engaged.</p> + +<p>John was only too glad that Blakely had hit upon +that idea, as he was anxious to visit that part of the +coast, contiguous to the copper deposit, and what was +more, he wanted to see the place where Blakely found +the missive which the boys had translated.</p> + +<p>As there was still a week before the <i>Wonder</i> would +sail for its northern port of call, both of the ships +wended their way to the east, skirting the coast as +closely as possible, John on the <i>Pioneer</i> with the +boys.</p> + +<p>They now had an opportunity to see the Great +South Mountains from the sea. They remembered +when they last saw them on land, during the campaign +against the Illyas, and also the wonderful village +on the western side of the mountains. What +would their present wanderings bring forth?</p> + +<p>That evening they landed within a cove, both vessels +being brought as near the shore as possible.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56">p. 56</a></span></p> + +<p>"We can safely go in close this evening, because the +tide is now out," said John.</p> + +<p>Sutoto, while he had navigated the vessel, and had +shown remarkable skill, was, nevertheless, not well +versed in tides and the action of the moon.</p> + +<p>Quick to learn, he asked John why the tides thus +changed. John explained the reason that the tides +flowed in and out twice during each twenty-four +hours, or a little less than that time, so that high +water, or low water would always be at a time a little +later each day, and then stated that it would be +an easy matter to so make the calculations that they +would be able to tell ahead for a whole year just +when during each day the highest or lowest water +would be.</p> + +<p>While waiting on the ship during the hours of the +evening they were interested in the magnificent fire +flies which they saw on the shore and along the mountain +side. This was not an unfamiliar sight to them +as they had witnessed such scenes many times before.</p> + +<p>But now they saw such sights as they had never +before observed. They must have been giant glow +birds, because some of the lights flew at least hundreds +of feet emitting continuous streams of light, +and this was not all, many of the lights were colored, +particularly red and blue or simply faint tinges of +those tints.</p> + +<p>"I have often thought that there is nothing more +wonderful than the fire fly," said George.</p> + +<p>"But what do you think makes it so wonderful?" +asked John.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57">p. 57</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, I suppose the wonderful part is that it has +strength enough to make a light," answered Harry.</p> + +<p>"No, the remarkable thing is that the light which +it emits is absolutely cool. +Experiments which have +been made go to show that +there is no heat. In every +form of light which man +has been able to produce +thus far artificially, a +great heat is evolved, and +it would be a most valuable +discovery to find out +why these insects are able to do it without raising the +temperature."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 176px;"> +<a id="illus-fig3" name="illus-fig3" /> +<a href="#p_57"> +<img src="images/illus-fig3-p057.png" width="176" height="178" +alt="Fig. 3. The Fire-fly." title="Fig 3. The Fire-fly." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Fire</span>-<span class="u">fly</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"But what difference does it make if heat is produced?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"The production of heat means the loss of power. +The heat generated takes up more of the power than +the light which is produced, so that it would be a +great economy if the heat could be dispensed with."</p> + +<p>"But if there was no heat in the light produced +would it make any difference in the lamps themselves?"</p> + +<p>"Unquestionably. The lamps would last much +longer."</p> + +<p>"What are the things which must be learned in +order to get the secret of cold light?"</p> + +<p>"Well, there are number of questions which must +be determined. While it is known that the fire fly +and the glow worm emit what is called a phosphores<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58">p. 58</a></span>cent +light, this fact is a mere prelude to the knowledge +of what is the exact color of daylight."</p> + +<p>"Color of Daylight? Why, I supposed it was +white."</p> + +<p>"But the light of the glow worm and fire fly are +not white."</p> + +<p>They watched them, and soon appreciated that +John's statement was true.</p> + +<p>"You asked what were some of the things to be +solved? Well, to find out the secret of the phosphorescent +glow. That is one thing. What is the best +artificial light, is the next. Then, what substance +will have the most intense glow when a current +passes through it, and give out the least heat."</p> + +<p>"Well, has no one attempted to explain any of +these things?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; many explanations have been offered, but +all of them leave the subject dark somewhere." And +John laughed as he saw that the boys appreciated his +little attempt at witticism.</p> + +<p>"But the time will come when man will find out +this, as everything in his way. When you think of it, +that electricians, chemists, metallurgists, physiologists, +engineers, physicists and microscopists, are all +working on the problem, we should be able to extract +the secret sooner or later."</p> + +<p>"I am going to have some of those fellows," +shouted George, and when the natives on board +heard the request of George there was a scramble for +the boats, and John was delighted to give them instructions +for capturing the insects.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59">p. 59</a></span></p> + +<p>Early the next day the entire party landed, and +Blakely, together with John and the boys, started +for the high peak, the one visible for miles from the +west, and which John and the boys often wished to +visit.</p> + +<p>One of the things which the boys brought with +them from the States, was a pair of strong glasses, +and these were constantly in use.</p> + +<p>"What do you say to scaling that point?" said +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Just what I have been thinking about," said +George.</p> + +<p>Sutoto, who was with the party, showed by his +glowing eyes that he wanted to be of the party. +"Certainly you shall go," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Before going we must visit the place where the +Walter note was found," called out John.</p> + +<p>The boys had forgotten this. "Most assuredly," +answered George, "I had almost forgotten that."</p> + +<p>Blakely led the way up alongside the rugged cliff. +"See that bluish green outcropping," he said as they +were pulling themselves up.</p> + +<p>John stopped and chipped off some specimens. +"Wonderful!" he exclaimed. "Better than anything +I have ever found in Mexico. These hills remind +me of the formation all along western Chihuahua, +and through northeastern Sonora."</p> + +<p>The ledge on which they finally emerged was fully +six hundred feet above sea level. When they turned +around and viewed the sea below them, and saw the +ships at anchor, they were delirious with joy. How<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60">p. 60</a></span> +Sutoto enjoyed the scene. He had never seen anything +like it before and he was amazed and stupefied. +He turned and grasped George by the hand. He was +too full to speak.</p> + +<p>"But wait, Sutoto, until we get to the top," said +Harry, as he saw his countenance. As they looked +up at the top they wondered what they might see +from the elevation.</p> + +<p>"Here is the spot," cried out Blakely. "This is +the pot in which the message was found. And here +is something that I dug up afterwards."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 367px;"> +<a id="illus-fig4" name="illus-fig4" /> +<a href="#p_60"> +<img src="images/illus-fig4-p060.png" width="367" height="157" +alt="Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull." title="Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">Inscription</span> <span class="u">on</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Skull</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The boys crowded around. It was a skull on +which was engraved the characters ABCC, followed +by a star.</p> + +<p>All looked at John, thinking he might offer some +solution. He turned it over, and examined every +portion. Not a word was spoken. "Tell me the exact +position in which this was found," he asked, as +he looked at Blakely.</p> + +<p>"The first thing I found was the pot, which was +simply turned upside down, in exactly this way.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61">p. 61</a></span> +This is the place. It rested on this flat stone. The +skull was behind it on this upper shelf."</p> + +<p>"And was there nothing else on the shelf?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing whatever."</p> + +<p>John stooped down and carefully examined the +shelf. All followed his motions. "Do you see that +mark?" he said, pointing to a heavy scratch, which +was now plain. "That mark is associated with the +skull, if not with the message. I am unable at this +time fully to decipher the marks on the skull, but I +have an idea of the meaning."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if the scratch across that is in the same +direction as the arrow in the letter?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Unquestionably: let me see your glasses," and +George unslung them as John took them and gazed +long in the direction of the line on the shelf.</p> + +<p>He lowered the glasses and slowly shook his head. +Something was forming itself in his mind, this was +evident. He walked around the ledge and back +again. Finally, he said: "I wish it were night, it +might help to solve the riddle."</p> + +<p>"And why?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Those letters have reference to the star which +follows."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me to be a singular thing that anyone +should leave this here in the hope or expectation +that it could be a guide for any one," remarked +George.</p> + +<p>"There is certainly one explanation of that," answered +John. "It is evident that the articles were +placed there as a form of note to others, and it is a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62">p. 62</a></span> +sort of cryptic sign, intelligible only to those who +have the key. The fact that these signs are here +denote several things, one of which is that something +important, such, for instance, as treasures, or the +location of hidden wealth, or the directions necessary +to find mining lodes, or even to point out the +direction and distances of other islands in the distance."</p> + +<p>"But," said Harry, "the fact that we have found +these things here looks as though there were other +parties besides Walter and that he was associated +with them in some sort of enterprise."</p> + +<p>"Quite true; but I am not at all satisfied that the +Walter note has anything to do with the skull. In +fact there is every evidence to me that they are entirely +disconnected with each other."</p> + +<p>This announcement was the most surprising to +Blakely, who now added a few points of information. +"I should have said that the skull was not exposed +as you now see it on the shelf. After I went up the +side of the hill, I returned and landed on the ledge, +and then I noticed the skull through the apertures +formed by the stones now lying at the side."</p> + +<p>"That is evidence to my mind, that Walter knew +nothing of the existence of the skull at the time he +left the message, and yet, singular as it may seem, +both the skull and Walter's message point to the +same thing."</p> + +<p>This announcement was certainly curious and interesting, +and keyed up the listeners to a high pitch +of expectation.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63">p. 63</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Exciting</span> as were the events alluded to in the last +chapter, the boys insisted on taking Sutoto to the top +of the peak. John and Blakely gathered up the fragments, +and when the boys left they were busily engaged +in making careful measurements of the stone +and ledges.</p> + +<p>It was not an easy task to gain the summit, but +when they reached it, there was spread before them +the most remarkable panorama. To the north they +could see South River, the first stream they discovered +when they came to the island.</p> + +<p>They looked on it almost lovingly. "If it were not +for the mountain range to the north we could see +clear to Cataract," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"The dear old place!" exclaimed George. Sutoto +smiled. He had been there, and he shared the views +of the boys.</p> + +<p>"Let me have the glasses," shouted Harry, as he +adjusted them and turned to the west. "Unity," +was the only thing he said, as he handed the glasses +to Sutoto. The latter looked, and stepped back in +surprise. George kept his eyes on Sutoto, as the latter +bent forward in his eagerness to see the town<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64">p. 64</a></span> +which was now so plain to him, although more than +fifty miles away.</p> + +<p>George leisurely took the glasses, as Sutoto said +slowly, and with proper emphasis, "Wonderful! +wonderful!"</p> + +<p>He turned the glasses to the southeast, hoping to +catch a glimpse of the land of treasures, but they saw +nothing but the wide open sea, calm and peaceful, +and he wondered that it could ever be so angry and +tempestuous as they had known it to be on two +momentous occasions.</p> + +<p>They remained there for a long time, and viewed +every portion of the island. When they descended +they took a route leading to the west, and when +nearly at the bottom, heard the unmistakable sounds +of voices below them. For a moment the boys were +alarmed, but Sutoto set up a shout, his quick ears +having detected the voices of their friends. It was +the first caravan load of copper which they were +taking from the great cave near the Illyas' village.</p> + +<p>"Glory! we are near the Illyas' village," said +Harry, as he stumbled down the mountain side, and +saw the train of men with the loads.</p> + +<p>They would now do some more visiting. They +must surely go over to the village where they captured +the last of the hostile tribes. As they neared +the village they were surprised to see Oma coming +toward them. He greeted them like a monarch, and +led them into the village.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to welcome you," he said. The boys +were astounded at the words. This man, the most<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65">p. 65</a></span> +vindictive and bitter of all the tribesmen, had learned +to speak, and showed by his actions that he was glad +to welcome them.</p> + +<p>But when they came to the village, the surprise of +the boys was so great that they could hardly speak. +Instead of filth and uncleanliness everywhere, they +saw carefully attended lawns, and houses, instead of +huts. The people came out and greeted them with +laughter.</p> + +<p>And then the boys recognized many of the men +who had lived in Unity, and who had worked for +them in the shops, and in the fields. The Chief then +escorted them to the large building, the same one in +which the Chief was captured by the boys, the year +before.</p> + +<p>What a change! Formerly the furniture in the +room was one jumbled mass of débris, and the household +arrangements were only such as savage conditions +warranted. Now, the large interior had been +cut up into rooms, and they were furnished with +comfortable belongings.</p> + +<p>The Chief saw the curiosity of the boys, and he +read their thoughts. "You wonder at the difference? +Yes; it is a difference. We owe it to that +wonderful Chief, and to you, and to John."</p> + +<p>"Yes; John will be here soon," said George.</p> + +<p>"I have seen him. He will be here. We are preparing +a great feast for him," and the boys opened +their eyes and smiled as they heard this announcement.</p> + +<p>The people flocked about them, and the men who<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66">p. 66</a></span> +knew the boys were only too proud to be recognized +by them. Thus they visited every nook and corner +of the town, surprised and glad to see that the Chief +had insisted on his people going to Unity and learning +the ways of the white people.</p> + +<p>There was a further reason why the coming of +John and of Blake was a joyous event. Oma had +been informed that the great copper mines were to +be opened in the mountains, which would insure work +for every one, and that they would be able to buy +every sort of luxury and enjoy all the comforts of the +white people.</p> + +<p>Late that evening John and Blakely came accompanied +by two hundred of the Illyas who had actually +been engaged during the day in transporting +copper from the cave to the hold of the <i>Wonder</i>.</p> + +<p>The feast and the celebration that night in a village +which, only a few months before, was of the +most savage character, was, indeed, a marvel. Oma +could scarcely express himself with enough earnestness, +and the women were following the boys with +their eyes, and actually caressing them, in their +eagerness to show appreciation.</p> + +<p>When the time came for them to leave, the Chief +accompanied the men to the shore below South +Mountain to witness their departure. Before they +left the village, the things which had been brought +there by the ships for the Illyas were placed in the +Chief's storehouse, and Blakely paid the members of +the party who had assisted them. This, also, was +the occasion for much rejoicing.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67">p. 67</a></span></p> + +<p>Blakely, on board the <i>Wonder</i>, waved an adieu to +the boys and John as the boats separated, and Sutoto +gave the order to sail directly southeast.</p> + +<p>During the afternoon the sea was calm and afforded +a beautiful sail, but during the night a strong +breeze came up and its intensity varied during the +night. The next day, however, the sea became +choppy, and over two-thirds of the natives were rolling +around on the deck in the agonies of sea-sickness.</p> + +<p>"This will give us an opportunity to try the new +cure for the malady," said John.</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Simply atrophine."</p> + +<p>"How is it administered?"</p> + +<p>"By injecting it."</p> + +<p>"What is atrophine?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"It is a crystalline, bitter and poisonous alkaloid, +taken from the deadly nightshade, and the same +principle is also found in the thorn apple."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it the same as belladonna?" remarked +George.</p> + +<p>"No; but belladonna is also an extract of nightshade."</p> + +<p>"Have you any of it here?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I brought some, together with the other +drugs that the Professor ordered, and I am anxious +to try it. The remedy was discovered by Prof. +Fischer, of Munich, and also simultaneously by Dr. +Reginald Pollard, of South Kensington, England."</p> + +<p>Accompanied by the boys John went among the +sufferers, and administered the medicine, giving at<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68">p. 68</a></span> +each injection about 1-64th of a grain. It was remarkable +in its effects. Within a half hour the +sickening feeling in the stomach disappeared, the +eyes began to grow bright again, the pulse full, and +the patient became strong and vigorous.</p> + +<p>None of them objected to John's ministrations. +Their confidence in his ability was sufficient for them +and the results justified their faith.</p> + +<p>When the boys came on deck in the morning, they +strained their eyes looking toward the horizon for +land but there was no land in sight. John was already +on deck and he smiled as he saw them ascend +the ladder. "And where is your island?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"How far have we gone?"</p> + +<p>"We have been driven somewhat out of our course, +it is true; but we are more than a hundred miles from +Wonder Island, and have sailed past the place where +the other island ought to be, according to Walter's +letter." And John chuckled somewhat, at the crestfallen +looks of the boys.</p> + +<p>"Where are we going now?"</p> + +<p>"I told Sutoto we would better tack to the southwest. +We can use up a day at that course, and then +double back, probably thirty or forty miles to the +south, and in that way we can cover a wide area."</p> + +<p>While sailing in that direction they had to go +pretty much into the face of the wind, but it was considered +wise to explore that region to the south of +the islands first, and then take another section to the +east or to the west.</p> + +<p>Night came on without any indications of land, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69">p. 69</a></span> +the course was altered directly to the east. The boys +remained up until nearly twelve that night, but no +light or evidence of land came in sight. Tired with +the exertions of the day, they retired, and were soon +asleep.</p> + +<p>How long they slept was immaterial to them. Sutoto +came into their cabin, and awakened them, saying, +"We can see some lights in the east." They +heard the voice, and its earnest expression, and without +waiting to dress scrambled out. Far off to the +southeast was a faint glimmer, then it died away.</p> + +<p>After a moment or two it appeared again, somewhat +brighter than before. The night was intensely +dark, and the wind was blowing a steady gale, so +that the boat not only rocked but it moved forward +into the lines of waves across their path.</p> + +<p>John was above, and they hurriedly rushed to see +him. He was smiling, as they approached, and he +greeted them by saying "We have reached your island, +probably."</p> + +<p>"How long have you seen the light?" asked +George.</p> + +<p>"A half hour, or more," he answered.</p> + +<p>The boys were not in the mood now to return to +bed, so they went back to dress, and then returned, +meanwhile watching the light with eager eyes. The +course of the ship was directed toward it, and every +one on board had now heard the news.</p> + +<p>Soon the watch on the port side sang out: "Land +ahead," and every one sprang to the left side. +There, plainly in the darkness, was a headland, or a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70">p. 70</a></span> +spur, which they were passing at almost right angles. +The most intense excitement prevailed.</p> + +<p>Still the light was directly ahead, and, apparently, +a long distance from them. John told Sutoto to haul +in the sails, and to take a course directly to the +south. He explained that it would be wise to stand +off the shore as long as possible, as the ship's clock +showed that it was now past four o'clock so that +within the next hour they might be able to view the +land clearly enough to determine their future course.</p> + +<p>Impatiently they awaited that period of gloom +which is said to be the darkest time,—just before the +dawn. This seemed to be so to the watchers, but +shortly after five the curtain lifted. A slight haze +was over the land, but they had found an island, at +least.</p> + +<p>"Do you know our position?" asked Harry, as +John approached. "Yes; I have just figured it out. +We are fifty leagues (one hundred and fifty miles) +southeast of Wonder Island."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other. Evidently Walter +was wrong, or they had read his letter incorrectly. +But they saw land, and John assured them that there +was no land between that place and their own island.</p> + +<p>Anxiously they awaited daylight, and when it came +they gazed out on a barren waste,—a rocky and uninviting +shore.</p> + +<p>"Steer for the little cove beyond the great rock," +said John.</p> + +<p>The sails were hoisted, and the vessel slowly moved<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71">p. 71</a></span> +south, and rounded into the waters bounded by the +circular shore line. The anchor was soon cast, and +then began the launching of the boats.</p> + +<p>John called the men before him, and gave a few +words of advice. "We have no knowledge of the +character of the land, or of the people who may live +there. Two boats will be manned, and ten will take +their places in each. Uraso will have charge of one, +and Muro of the other. When we reach the shore +Muro will remain with the men under his command, +while Uraso will follow me. It will be understood +that so long as no shots are heard by Muro and his +party that our expedition is safe, but should any firing +be heard, then the ship must be signaled and +those in the vessel here must come to shore, and Muro +with his soldiers will at once come to our relief. I +hope we shall have no occasion for calling on you, +but we must be prepared for any emergency."</p> + +<p>The two boats pulled for the shore. After landing +John, with Uraso's men the boys quickly scrambled +up the rough cliffs beyond. When the heights +were gained they looked over a beautifully wooded +landscape, but it was still, except for the birds and +the small animals which looked at them in a startled +manner, and then scurried for cover.</p> + +<p>"I doubt whether there are any people living +here," remarked Harry. "There is not a sign of +living beings."</p> + +<p>"You are quite mistaken there," said John.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at John. "Have you seen any +signs?" asked George.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72">p. 72</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes; did you notice how the animals fled at our +approach?"</p> + +<p>They had noticed it, but neglected to draw any inference +from it.</p> + +<p>"That is one of the surest signs. Do you now +remember how differently the animals acted in the +region around Cataract from those in the southwest +portion of Wonder Island?"</p> + +<p>"I now remember that is so. Don't you remember, +George, when we came across the first herd of +yaks, that they hardly noticed us? I am sure that +the animals out at West River didn't wait to interview +us."</p> + +<p>"Well, I remember the big bear was very anxious +to make our acquaintance," said George, and Harry +smiled, as he remembered how the big fellow took +his revenge by tearing up their baggage.</p> + +<p>John directed the men to the right, and in the direction +of an elevation which seemed to be clear of timber. +From that point they searched the intervening +wooded area, and caught sight of a still higher tableland +miles beyond.</p> + +<p>"Your glasses would be serviceable here," said +John. George handed them to John, and he gazed +through them long and earnestly. "I am unable to +find any traces of human beings, and I cannot account +for the light which we saw during the night, +and which must have been nearly ahead of us."</p> + +<p>He walked forward, the men following. They +marched for more than a mile, every object being +examined. Fallen trees were particularly investi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73">p. 73</a></span>gated, +and clumps of trees were searched, even the +bark of trees being minutely gone over by John.</p> + +<p>The natives, generally so keen to discover evidences +of their kind, walked along, and shook their +heads, to indicate the absence of all signs. The land +in the interior was elevated, but it was not rough or +broken, the only place where an upheaval had taken +place appearing to be the west coast.</p> + +<p>"This seems to look bad for our purposes," said +John, as he turned to the boys.</p> + +<p>"What do you mean?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"I don't think there are any caves in this section," +he answered. "But we might as well investigate +farther to the right, and see what the land looks +like."</p> + +<p>"Aren't those coffee trees?" said George, in great +eagerness, as he bounded forwardly.</p> + +<p>There, not a hundred feet away, were the beautiful +trees with white clusters all over them. Thousands +of these trees were in sight.</p> + +<p>"I believe we have struck a coffee plantation," exclaimed +Harry.</p> + +<p>John did not answer, but went up to one of the +trees and carefully examined it. "No, these trees +have grown wild, and no one has ever gathered the +berries."</p> + +<p>"But what an opportunity there would be here for +gathering coffee! Too bad Blakely isn't here," said +George.</p> + +<p>"We never saw anything like it on Wonder Island," +suggested Harry. "Now, why is it that co<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74">p. 74</a></span>coa +will grow in wonderful profusion on one island, +and none on the next, and the other island will have +bananas and the other not?"</p> + +<p>"The explanation of that has been the means of +bringing out a wonderful study, that is explained by +the nature of the soil itself. In every country certain +sections will spontaneously produce product +alike, in almost every essential quality. Thus, flax, +for instance, is found, identical in its character, in +Kamscatska, and in Minnesota; in the Siberian wilds +and in Central America; on the heights of the Himalayas, +and in the lowest plains of South America."</p> + +<p>"But how do you explain the similarity? They +must have come from seed, and how did the seeds get +from place to place, when there were no ships to +carry them?"</p> + +<p>"There can be only one explanation. The soil itself, +if identical in its character, will, eventually, +produce the same vegetables and vegetation. Thus, +it has been found that the localities where this wild +flax was found, had soil which was the same in its +nature, and calculated to produce the same in kind."</p> + +<p>For four hours the little band marched to the +south, and came back along a track nearer the sea, +without discovering the slightest indication of human +habitations, except the frightened looks and +actions of the animals in their path.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 1.5em;"> +<a id="illus-075" name="illus-075" /> +<a href="images/illus-p075-large.jpg"> +<img src="images/illus-p075.jpg" width="395" height="596" alt="He turned it over and examined every portion" +title="He turned it over and examined every portion" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">"He turned it over and examined every portion"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_60">See p. 60</a>]</p> +</div> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75">p. 75</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Weary</span>, they dragged themselves over the cliffs +and down to the waiting natives. Muro was surprised +to learn that they had found no signs of people, +so they rowed back to the ship, and after a +hearty meal, retired for the night.</p> + +<p>In the morning when they asked John for his opinion, +he said, "The only course is to sail south, and +circumnavigate the island. In doing so we shall effect +a landing every ten miles or so, and then go into +the interior. This will thus enable us to learn all +about the land. At the same time we must survey +the island, so as to learn its extent, as well as its +general shape and outline."</p> + +<p>"But how can we survey it without the instruments?"</p> + +<p>"That is readily done, by observing the headlands, +or some special coast line marks, and then taking +the angles from those points."</p> + +<p>"Well, that will be interesting, at least. How +shall we start?"</p> + +<p>"Do you see that point to the south which may +be five or ten miles away?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Now, examine the compass, and turn it so that<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76">p. 76</a></span> +the cardinal points are directly north and south. +Now sight across the face of the compass so that you +get the exact line between this point and yonder object. +What do you make it to be?"</p> + +<p>"Why I make it out to be S. E."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 393px;"> +<a id="illus-fig5" name="illus-fig5" /> +<a href="#p_76"> +<img src="images/illus-fig5-p076.png" width="393" height="339" +alt="Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation." +title="Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">Measuring</span> <span class="u">by</span> <span class="u">Triangulation</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"That is correct. The line 1 is south by east."</p> + +<p>"But how can we find out how long line 1 is?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Why by triangulation," said George, quickly.</p> + +<p>"I know that, but how can we do it on sea?"</p> + +<p>"It can be done on sea, as well as on land, but we +had better go and make the first measurement by tri<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77">p. 77</a></span>angulation +correctly, and do this in our subsequent +measurements, unless it should be necessary to make +the measurements at sea. The plan followed on +shipboard will be found similar to the plan followed +on land."</p> + +<p>The boat was manned and the boys with a crew of +the men and John made for the shore, and together +they went inland to a point marked B (<a href="#illus-fig5">Fig. 5</a>), and +sighted across to the same object C that was noted +of the ship. This, then, gave three lines, 1, 2 and +3, forming a triangle.</p> + +<p>"If these angles are placed on a paper the distance +from A to C can be determined on the principles +of proportion," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"How is that done?"</p> + +<p>"We will assume that the lines 1, 2, are at right +angles to each other. This is not necessary, but it +happens to be so in this case. Let us first measure +the distance along the line 2, which may be any number +of inches, or feet. Suppose we call the line one +inch long. Then draw the line 1, so that it will be +sufficiently long to be sure and meet the line 3."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I now see how it is done," remarked George, +with enthusiasm. "If the line 3 is drawn at the +angle we got, when we looked at C, from B, the line +will cross line 1 at C."</p> + +<p>"That is correct. Now, if it is one inch from A to +B, we may use that inch as a measurement to get the +distance along the line."</p> + +<p>"Let me step it off," said Harry. "I find it is +just two and three-quarters inches."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78">p. 78</a></span></p> + +<p>"What was the distance, in feet from A to B?" +asked John.</p> + +<p>"I have the figures here," said George. "We +found it was six hundred and ninety feet."</p> + +<p>"If, now, you will multiply 690 by 2-3/4, we shall +have the distance from this point A, and yonder +point, or headland C."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;"> +<a id="illus-fig6" name="illus-fig6" /> +<a href="#p_78"> +<img src="images/illus-fig6-p078.png" width="361" height="279" +alt="Fig. 6. The Second Limb." title="Fig. 6. The Second Limb." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Second</span> <span class="u">Limb</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"I make it out to be just 1897.5," was Harry's conclusion.</p> + +<p>The boys, together with John and a half dozen of +the natives, went along the shore, and mounted the +point C, and from that place selected another point +in a southerly direction, and again made the same +calculations.</p> + +<p>The vessel in the meantime was put under sail and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79">p. 79</a></span> +anchored a mile below, giving the surveying party +time to make several triangulations, and late in the +afternoon the party came on board, tired and ready +to take a rest.</p> + +<p>From the position taken up by the ship they could +see a long stretch of shore line, practically straight, +trending toward the southeast, and with their glass +could see, miles away, a headland which afforded a +pronounced point for observation.</p> + +<p>The next morning the same parties rowed to the +shore, and Uraso was left with the party to guard the +shore boat, while Muro accompanied John and the +boys. On this occasion John issued the following +instruction:</p> + +<p>"The long point which you see in the distance +is, probably, 15 miles beyond. It is not more than +that, but this clear atmosphere is liable to deceive. I +have instructed Sutoto to wait until one o'clock today, +and if by that time there is no word from us +Uraso will return to the ship, and you will take up +anchor and steer for the headland beyond."</p> + +<p>"So that you may understand our movements, we +will strike into the interior, taking a course due east, +for ten miles, or thereabout, and then turn to the +south, and reach the sea near the place where the +vessel will be located."</p> + +<p>"I understand, now, how the distance can be +measured by triangulation on land; but how to get +the distances, on shipboard, is what puzzles me," +said Harry.</p> + +<p>John smiled as he replied: "I knew you would<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80">p. 80</a></span> +come to that sooner or later, so I prepared a little +sketch (<a href="#illus-fig7">Fig. 7</a>), which shows the bow of a vessel, +and the tall mast. The lines from A to B give an +angle with the vertical line of the mast, which will +enable you to determine how far the ship is from any +point."</p> + +<p>"But I am still in the dark as to how, even if we +have that distance, we can thereby tell by triangulation, +on the vessel, how far one point is from another +on the land."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 391px;"> +<a id="illus-fig7" name="illus-fig7" /> +<a href="#p_80"> +<img src="images/illus-fig7-p080.png" width="391" height="188" +alt="Fig. 7. Triangulation from a Vessel." title="" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">Triangulation</span> <span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">a</span> <span class="u">Vessel</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"After the distance from the vessel to the point is +determined, as I have shown, then the length of the +ship itself is used as the two points to sight from, and +the two lines thus projected, from the opposite ends +of the vessel, together with the line lengthwise along +the ship, form a triangle, the same as the triangle +lines 1, 2, 3, in the sketch (<a href="#illus-fig5">Fig. 5</a>)."</p> + +<p>It might be well at this place to describe the equipment +of the party as it left the boat. The natives +carried a plentiful supply of provisions. Each had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81">p. 81</a></span> +a gun, the best kind of breech loaders, and also a +spear.</p> + +<p>The natives love to handle spears better than anything +else in the way of a weapon, and each also had +a knife, and some carried the inevitable bolo, that +primitive form of hatchet which is known all over the +world where steel or iron is available, and the people +have arrived at such a state that they are able to +make metal articles.</p> + +<p>John and the boys also carried guns, but the boys +had revolvers, seven shooters, not of large bore, but +very convenient weapons, in close quarters. Each +carried also a knife, and belt to contain the cartridges +for the guns.</p> + +<p>Harry carried a camera, which he had brought +from the States, and George had the field glass +strapped across the shoulders. John felt that they +had a force large enough to make a fairly effective +stand against a pretty strong force of natives, the +entire party counting, in this instance, sixteen.</p> + +<p>As they advanced into the interior, it was evident +that they were gradually ascending, so that at about +six miles from the landing place they reached the +crest of the rising ground. Beyond, where the nature +of the ground permitted they saw clearly that +the distance beyond had a lower altitude than the +place where they stood.</p> + +<p>During this trip there was no evidence that the +island was occupied, but they saw the most amazing +evidences of tropical fruits and trees. Magnificent +trees were in evidence everywhere, and the woods,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82">p. 82</a></span> +besides mahogany, and ebony, were of the most valuable +character.</p> + +<p>John noted all these things, but the boys were +most interested in the birds and animals which +roamed about. The latter were not large or vicious +looking, but it was not permitted to shoot any of +them lest it might alarm Uraso, who was at the landing.</p> + +<p>Ahead could be seen several ridges, one of them +heavily wooded. Reaching the summit they beheld +a beautiful valley below, and opposite on a shelving +rock, stood a type of mountain deer like a sentinel, +while a dozen or more were feeding on the green +slope beneath.</p> + +<p>Frequently on the march the boys would take side +trips, in the attempt to run down some of the curious +animals, but they were careful to keep the main +force in sight.</p> + +<p>Thus they tramped on fully five miles beyond the +crest of the ridge, and occasionally John would stop +to examine some suspicious-looking indication of +habitation.</p> + +<p>"It would surprise me very much to find that the +island is not inhabited," he said, as he examined +what appeared to be a path.</p> + +<p>At this juncture one of the native scouts came up +and showed John a curious stone formation. John +took it, and turned it over several times. "That is +part of a stone hatchet." The scout nodded assent +with a smile.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83">p. 83</a></span></p> + +<p>All now became intent on searching. This finally +resulted in bringing to light a well-formed spear, not +unlike those originally used on Wonder Island among +the native tribes.</p> + +<p>Surely they were getting evidence pretty fast now. +Then, while crossing a little rivulet, one of the scouts +plainly saw the print of a native foot, which was +unmistakable. True, it had been made days before, +probably a month, but there it was, and now it was +incumbent on them to find out where the people were.</p> + +<p>The entire party scattered along the little stream, +and searched both banks for a considerable distance, +the boys taking an active part in the work. Usually +the boys kept together, and entertained each other, +but on this occasion all were so intent on discovering +where, and in what direction the footprints would +lead, that they quite forgot to watch each other.</p> + +<p>John gave a customary whistle, as he was in the +habit of doing, when it was desired to call the party +together, and all of the scouts promptly returned, as +well as Harry. George was nowhere to be seen. +John questioned Harry. He had first missed him at +the bend in the stream not two hundred feet to the +north.</p> + +<p>He rushed back in that direction, while John gave +another blast on the whistle, and then listened intently +for a reply. Harry came back without any +intelligence, and almost frantic. John and the +scouts then broke into a run, and Harry turned with +them.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84">p. 84</a></span></p> + +<p>That instant a shot rang out. "That must be +George," exclaimed John. "Forward as quickly as +possible."</p> + +<p>The party turned the bend of the river. All along +this part of the stream the banks were cut up by +ridges and diminutive cliffs, and in many places were +large shelving rocks which came up close to the +stream.</p> + +<p>Immediately after the shot John stopped, and +listened for some sound, and the natives, usually so +alert to recognize noises, did likewise.</p> + +<p>"That shot means that George is in some danger," +said John.</p> + +<p>"But why does he not answer the whistle? Why +should he shoot, and then not call to us, if there is +any danger," said Harry in despair.</p> + +<p>They turned the bend, and searched to and fro. +The shot could not have been more than eight hundred +feet away. The searchers spread out into a +fan-shaped formation. One of the scouts ran up +hurriedly and called to John, who went forward, and +there, alongside of a huge rock, where there was little +grass, he saw unmistakable evidence of a scuffle.</p> + +<p>"These are the footprints of George's shoes," remarked +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and here are the prints of the native feet," +said John, as one of the scouts distinctly pointed out +two or three well defined marks.</p> + +<p>"They are, undoubtedly, near at hand. We must +now be on our guard," said John, as he pondered +on the situation.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85">p. 85</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wonder why they didn't attack us?" asked +Harry.</p> + +<p>"The reason, no doubt, is that it is a small party. +A larger body would not have attempted to capture +one of us by stealth."</p> + +<p>John turned to Hasmo, one of the fleetest runners, +and instructed him to go back to the landing place +at once, and advise Uraso to bring his men and provisions, +as well as additional ammunition, and to hold +the ship until additional word should be sent.</p> + +<p>Hasmo was off in an instant, and then John issued +additional instructions. "It is evident," he said, +"that we must look for the people to the east or, +more likely, toward the southeast. That is the +reason why I had the boat held at the place where we +have just landed. There is also another reason why +I think the tribes, if there are any, are to the south, +and that is, in this latitude they are much less exposed +to the effects of the great winds that occur at +certain portions of the year."</p> + +<p>Harry wandered about, not knowing what to do, at +this terrible catastrophe. George in the hands of the +savages! He could hardly believe it.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about George too much," said John +consolingly. "I am inclined to think he has had +enough experience within the past two years to help +him out of immediate trouble, and we will then be +able to take a hand."</p> + +<p>This somewhat relieved Harry. It is possible that +George might be able to take care of himself. "But +suppose they kill him?" This was his great fear.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86">p. 86</a></span></p> + +<p>"It is not at all likely they will do that," remarked +Muro. "Those who captured him form only a small +party, and it is not at all likely that there was a chief +with them. Under the circumstances they would not +dare kill him until the Chief ordered it."</p> + +<p>John smiled as he nodded at the explanation +given by Muro. After all, it was not as bad as it +might be. Now to the rescue. Muro begged permission +to do scouting work until Uraso arrived, and +selecting Stut as his companion, they glided through +the forest directly to the east.</p> + +<p>They were now fully twelve miles from the boat, +and the runner could be depended on to reach Uraso +within an hour, if not hindered on the journey. It +would then take, possibly, two hours more for the +party to return, so that it was safe to assume that +they would have to remain in the vicinity for the next +three hours.</p> + +<p>John decided that the time should be spent in exploring +the directions to the southeast and to the +northeast as well, so they might be well informed +when the reinforcements arrived.</p> + +<p>Hasmo glided through the forest like a deer. He +knew that it was imperative to reach the shore before +one o'clock, because at that time the vessel would +leave for the southeastern point. To get there too +late would mean a trip for fifteen miles or more along +the shore to reach the next landing.</p> + +<p>The dense forest near the shore prevented him +from seeing the vessel until he crossed the last ridge,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87">p. 87</a></span> +and when he finally came within view of the harbor +the ship had disappeared. He stopped and glanced +to the south, but no ship was in sight. This was a +situation which had been considered, from the point +of view of the departure of the vessel; but where had +it gone?</p> + +<p>He went to the shore, where Uraso's party had +been, and then, laboriously ascended the point beyond, +and from which he could get a clear view of the +sea. There, far beyond, was the <i>Pioneer</i>, sailing to +the southeast under a strong breeze.</p> + +<p>He tore off his jacket, and seizing a branch, began +to wave it back and forth. The ship went on, and +there was no indication that they noticed him. He +remained thus for nearly a quarter of an hour, and +then knew that he must follow the ship until he +reached the next landing place.</p> + +<p>The trip along the shore was a most difficult one, +as he could not follow the beach. Many of the rocks +along the shore were licked by the waves, so that he +had to take a course beyond the cliffs, and the land +was not only rough, but numerous gulleys, or draws, +as they are called, were washed out, making speed +impossible.</p> + +<p>It required more than two hours to make the trip, +and it was considerably after three when he hailed +the boat from the shore, and hurriedly told the story +of George's capture.</p> + +<p>Uraso was not slow in gathering the men needed +for the expedition, and when the guns and ammuni<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88">p. 88</a></span>tion +were brought out all of the men actually begged +to go along, but he knew that John would not sanction +leaving the vessel without a crew.</p> + +<hr class="sorta" /> + +<p>John and his scouts impatiently awaited the return +of the men and during this time received the reports +from the scouts as they came in. It was evident +from the slight traces found that the band which captured +George had gone east. It was no doubt from +some indication to this effect obtained by Muro, that +induced him to take his course in that direction, also.</p> + +<p>All had departed but Muro: Four o'clock came, +and then five, but neither Muro nor Uraso appeared. +This did, indeed, look strange to John, who could, in +a measure, account for Muro's non-appearance; but +he could not understand why Uraso did not come. +It then occurred that after all Hasmo might not have +been able to reach the landing before sailing time, +and with this theory he consoled Harry, who was constantly +on the alert, waiting for tidings.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89">p. 89</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Let</span> us now follow George. He went along the +stream on its westerly side, while Harry was examining +the eastern shore. Coming to a little rivulet, +which flowed into the main stream at this point, he +passed alongside the projecting ledges of rock, that +for the moment hid him from the view of Harry.</p> + +<p>Here he saw some peculiar rocks, and outcroppings, +which reminded him so forcibly of the early +days on Wonder Island, when the Professor so +strongly impressed on them the value of investigation. +The gun was stood up, leaning against the +rocks, when he was seized by two strong arms, and a +hand placed over his mouth.</p> + +<p>In the struggle his hand touched the gun, and as +his captor drew him back, he took the gun with him, +and no effort was made to dispossess him of the +weapon. He was carried along, one hand pinioned to +his side, while the other hand carrying the gun was +free, but he was unable to use it.</p> + +<p>He could not have been carried more than a hundred +feet, before he heard John's whistle. This +startled his captors, for he now saw that there were +two burly specimens, almost wholly naked, and for +the moment the hold on the imprisoned arm was relaxed.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90">p. 90</a></span></p> + +<p>Quick as a flash he drew up the gun and fired. +This was the shot heard by John and Harry. The +shot was such a surprise that the savages were almost +paralyzed, and dropped their hold, but it was only +for an instant. Realizing that the noise was made +by George's weapon, and not caused by any of the +boy's companions, the nearest savage swung around +viciously, and poor George was knocked unconscious +by the blow.</p> + +<p>How long he remained in this state he did not +know. When consciousness returned he was lying, +on some tufted grass, and a half dozen vicious looking +savages stood around him. Then he remembered +the circumstances of his capture.</p> + +<p>He eyed them for a time, and then slowly sat up. +One of the party had George's field glasses slung +around him, just as he himself had them on when +captured. One of them was fondling the gun, but +it was evident from the manner in which he held it +that he had no knowledge of its uses.</p> + +<p>His cartridge belt graced the form of one of the +other savages, and it was evident that they considered +the things thus taken more in the nature of ornaments +than as weapons. He slowly felt his pockets +and was surprised that they had removed nothing.</p> + +<p>While he was rising to a sitting posture he could +feel his revolver, and wondered why he had not been +disarmed. A glimmer of joy shot through him. His +hands were free, and he had no pain, except the sore +feeling that was keen on the side of his head, and +which was, no doubt, caused by the blow.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91">p. 91</a></span></p> + +<p>Not a word was spoken by either. He hoped something +would be said and probably he would be able +to recognize the language, as his two years' experience +in Wonder Island gave him a fairly good understanding +of the native tongues.</p> + +<p>He pronounced some words, in the Saboro and also +in the Illya dialect, but they stared at each other, and +answered in some words that were utterly unlike anything +known on their own island.</p> + +<p>Soon, after a conversation among themselves, he +was raised up and urged forward. The first thing +that George did was to note the position of the sun, +and he then stealthily drew out his watch.</p> + +<p>When the savages, who were closely watching him, +saw the watch two of them pounced upon him, and in +the struggle, one of them tore it from the chain. The +holder of the chain threw it away, and attacked the +one who had the watch.</p> + +<p>This was certainly an interesting struggle for +George to witness. He had his thoughts, however. +Now was the time to make a strike for liberty, so he +quietly moved his hand toward the revolver. George +was not aware that a pair of eyes was intently watching +him while the struggle was going on.</p> + +<p>Before the hand reached the revolver, the savage +leaped forward. His heart sank. The opportunity +was lost. He dove down into the pocket and brought +forth a knife, and it was hardly out of his pocket +until the prying native had it in his hand.</p> + +<p>George gave a forced smile. The native saw it, +and looked admiringly at the beautiful handle. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92">p. 92</a></span> +turned it around and viewed it from every side, and +then deftly drew a strand of material from his clout +and, winding it around the knife, threw the loop of +the strand over his head.</p> + +<p>This, too, then, was an ornament! They did not +know the uses of the knife. George kept up the +smile, and soon the savage smiled in return. This +was a good beginning, surely! But what surprised +him most of all was the perfectly natural manner in +which the defeated party in the contest after the +watch took his loss.</p> + +<p>The victor fashioned it as a pendant, and the other +looked calmly on while his opponent admired it. +There was not a particle of resentment in the loser.</p> + +<p>George did not show any alarm to the savages, +although it would be too much to say that he was entirely +at ease. The instructions received from John, +the experiences of Tom and Ralph when they were +captured, were lessons for him, so, when the savages +smiled back at him he pointed to the knife, and made +motions as though he intended to open the blade.</p> + +<p>All savages are curious. Many of them have this +trait developed to a remarkable degree. George's +motions attracted the man. Then he leaned forward, +and removed the knife from the loop. He held it up, +exactly like a magician would exhibit some article +that he intended should disappear.</p> + +<p>Then, as the savage's mouth was now open, he inserted +his thumb nail into the crease of the large +knife, and opened the blade. Then he extended out +his hand, and offered the open knife to the savage.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93">p. 93</a></span></p> + +<p>To say that he was merely surprised is putting it +mildly. He could not possibly open his eyes wider, +and instead of taking it, drew back. Then George +quickly closed the blade again, and offered it in that +way, and he was induced to slowly take it back, while +he glanced at George suspiciously.</p> + +<p>The burly individual who carried the field glass +was then approached by George. The latter took +the glasses and put them to his eyes. At this act +the savages set up a whoop, and the glass was +snatched from him. Evidently they thought it was +something like the gun.</p> + +<p>George smiled, and again made the motion, as +though he desired to take the glass. The savage +took the loop from his neck, and handed the instrument +to George. The latter put it to his eyes and +pointed them to the east, carefully adjusting them to +get the proper focus.</p> + +<p>To his surprise he saw the evidences of a village +in the far distant landscape, and, beyond it, the sea. +What a discovery this was, indeed!</p> + +<p>The glasses were then presented to the burly savage, +who now claimed its ownership, and tried to +induce him to look through it. In this George finally +succeeded, and after he saw the effect of the distant +landscape, the attitude of the man changed, and he +looked on George with a species of admiration and +wonderment.</p> + +<p>George walked about them, in the most careless +manner imaginable, but they never took their eyes +from him. He smiled at them, again took the knife<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94">p. 94</a></span> +and performed the feat over and over again, and +then instructed the savage how to do it.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he thought of the match safe. What a +jolly trick that would be to spring on them. But it +would be more effective at night, he reflected, and so +he refrained from taking it out. It was evident, +however, that he was making a hit of some kind. +Whether it would aid him in escaping he did not +know, but he tried every means possible to ingratiate +himself, and to show that he had no fear. +The view of the village which he had accidentally +discovered impressed itself on him with startling +force. If he once reached the village escape would +be difficult, and consequently he viewed the searching +eyes of his captors with great uneasiness.</p> + +<p>This was evident by the cat-like action of the one +who got the knife. If he made the slightest move of +his hands, he could see the eyes following them. +Once he stumbled as they were marching along. +This was purposely done, in the hope that during the +time he was recovering his erect position he could +draw the revolver.</p> + +<p>He had his course of action all planned out. He +had no desire to kill, and he made up his mind that +he would first cover them and then by motions wave +them away, but it would be necessary to depend upon +mimicry for this.</p> + +<p>He had learned from John that savages are +naturally the most expert pantomimists, and are able +to express many things by gestures, this faculty having +been made the more acute because the different<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95">p. 95</a></span> +tribes are frequently brought into contact without +any connecting link in the dialects or languages.</p> + +<p>If they refused, or made any attempt to seize him, +he would then shoot the leader, and thus strike terror +into the others. But while he was thus arranging +all the details in his mind, he was startled at seeing +a whole group of savages leap from the side of the +ill-defined path, which they were now traveling, and +they speedily surrounded the captor and captive.</p> + +<p>Then began a bedlam of explanations as they +crowded around George. Some came up and felt his +arms, and other portions of his body. He smiled +meanwhile. It was the only thing he could do, and +he knew it would be useless to look troubled.</p> + +<p>The next moment the visitors were examining the +glass, the cartridge belt, the knife and the watch, and +George was, temporarily forgotten, although surrounded +so that he could not possibly force his way +through.</p> + +<p>He thought it a remarkable thing that they should +thus hold and watch him with such tenacity. While +thus discussing him, a new party appeared, and now +for the first time there was an attempt to show deference.</p> + +<p>The leader of the party was the most powerful +savage George had ever seen. Uraso was a powerful +warrior, and Chum was also noted for his +strength, but it seemed that the man now coming up +must be a giant. Some of the immediate party +rushed up to him, and after making a respectful bow, +told him of the capture.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96">p. 96</a></span></p> + +<p>He approached with dignity, and those around +George moved away.</p> + +<p>Without a moment's hesitation George moved +toward the Chief, and when ten feet away, he +stopped, straightened himself erect, and with a most +courtly bow smiled as he recovered his position.</p> + +<p>The strong and resolute manner in which this was +done was really a cause for marvel in the savage. +He looked at his people, and spoke a few words, and +those who had been his guards came forward most +deferentially, and, so far as George could understand, +told of the circumstances surrounding his capture.</p> + +<p>But there was one thing which struck George as a +peculiar thing. The three men who had participated +in the loot of his valuables did not exhibit them while +talking to the Chief.</p> + +<p>There was a long palaver, and many gestures indulged +in. The question occurred to him: What +had become of the articles which they had taken? +Did they purposely hide them?</p> + +<p>At the close of the conversation two of the Chief's +immediate associates came forward, and began to investigate +his belongings. The first thing they +brought out was the revolver, and at this George was +almost on the point of breaking down. Then he grew +bitter.</p> + +<p>The silver match box was the next to attract the +attention of the searchers; and so they went through +from one pocket to the other in the most approved +style.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97">p. 97</a></span></p> + +<p>These were laid before the Chief who grunted his +approval at the different things, and his admiration, +judging from the character of his remarks, was unbounded +at the silver-plated revolver.</p> + +<p>From the curious way in which he handled it +George was alarmed. It was an automatic, and if +the Chief once pulled the trigger there would be +trouble for some one. George held up a warning +hand, and the Chief looked up from the weapon.</p> + +<p>The only thing he could do was to point to the +revolver, and vigorously shake his head. The Chief +looked around as though inquiring the meaning of +such a sign. He was not interfered with as he +walked up to the savage, and held out his hand. The +Chief handed him the weapon.</p> + +<p>Then, picking up a leaf, he motioned to one near +him to place it on the side of a tree. At a word from +the Chief the man did so, but George motioned to him +to carry it still further away. He took deliberate +aim, and thanks to his long and regular practice, the +leaf received the impress of the bullet, while the savages +jumped in all directions at the report.</p> + +<p>Only the Chief remained impassive. He never +moved, but when the leaf was brought to him, he +looked on the youth with a kindly smile. George was +quick to notice this. He again walked over to the +Chief, and placed the weapon in his hand, and +guided his finger to the trigger, while at the same +time holding up his hand so as to sight it.</p> + +<p>This time the shot was directed to the nearest tree. +The savages scurried to give them room. When the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98">p. 98</a></span> +Chief pulled the trigger and the discharge followed, +George caught him by the arm, and took him to the +tree, pointing out the hole made by the bullet.</p> + +<p>There was a wondering look on the Chief's face. +He looked at the weapon, and then at the hole. +There was a question in the peculiar guttural sounds +of his language, which slowly came from his lips. +Evidently the Chief wanted to know something.</p> + +<p>Ah! he knew what it was. What made the hole? +George took the weapon, and extracted one of the +bullets, and then pointed to the hole in the tree. It +was plain that even this did not satisfy him. Better +still; why not dig out the bullet; and as he thought of +it he instinctively reached in his pocket for the knife.</p> + +<p>Then he remembered. One of his captors had it. +Without any ceremony he walked over to the man +who had it, and by motions indicated that he wanted +the knife. The savage was mute. He boldly +searched the folds of the rude clout, and without a +protest on the part of the savage he brought forth the +coveted knife.</p> + +<p>This action was indeed a surprise to the Chief. A +frown gathered on the Chief's face. George saw it, +and really trembled for the first time, as he saw the +eyes of the Giant riveted on the knife, and then +turned to the culprit. The latter fell to the ground, +and muttered something, and instantly the two others +were also seized, as they uncovered the other belongings +and laid them before the Chief.</p> + +<p>George looked on the scene with genuine regret. +The culprits were led away, and he speculated on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99">p. 99</a></span> +their fate. But the Chief's eyes immediately returned +to the hole in the tree, while the gaze of the +others rested on the cartridges, the watch and the +field glasses. The knife was in George's hand, and +he slowly opened it whereat the appearance of the +blade startled the Chief. He was all eagerness now, +so George closed the blade and opened it again, and +then cut a circle around the bullet hole and chipped +the wood away.</p> + +<p>There was the bullet, and he slowly drew it forth, +a shapeless bit of lead. When he had deposited it in +the Chief's hand, he laid one of the cartridges alongside, +and also showed the empty shell. Then he +quietly laid the closed knife in the Chief's hand and +stood back with his arms folded, as though he owned +the entire Island.</p> + +<p>If the action of the Chief counted for anything the +boy did have everything in sight. The Chief returned +the revolver to George, and then began to +examine the articles before him. The most interesting +appeared to be the cartridge belt. He looked at +the revolver and cartridges, and then turned over the +revolver bullet and shell which George had exhibited.</p> + +<p>It was now plain that the Chief could not understand +the use of the large cartridges. George's +mind was working by this time. He did not recall +that the gun was in evidence at any time after they +met the first crowd on the road.</p> + +<p>The Chief pointed to the cartridges, and George +looked toward the group which had captured him. +This was enough for the wily savage. A stern com<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100">p. 100</a></span>mand +was issued, and in an incredible short space of +time the gun appeared. Where it could have been +hidden was a marvel. Certainly these people must +be adepts in the art of concealment.</p> + +<p>The Chief handled the gun in a most awkward +fashion and George politely took it from his hand, +and after glancing about for a moment, saw a bird +on a branch. This he brought down, upon which one +of the men ran forward, picked it up and brought +it to the Chief. After this the weapon was turned +over to him, and the peculiar chuckle that followed +was, undoubtedly, the savage's way of expressing +delight.</p> + +<p>One of the attendants then came forward at the +order of the Chief, who, after the articles were gathered +up, indicated to George that he should follow, +and turned toward the village. George did not regard +the prerogatives of royalty, but he took up a +most democratic position by the side of the Chief, +to which the latter did not object.</p> + +<p>It required nearly an hour before they reached the +village. Women and children, and boys his own age +were in evidence everywhere. They came out of the +huts and followed the procession, on the way to the +Chief's quarters.</p> + +<p>Singularly George did not now feel the slightest +bit of fear. On the other hand, there was confidence, +a sort of assurance that he could not express. This +feeling came to him, not so much from the general +demeanor of the Chief, as on account of the one act, +namely, the return to him of the revolver.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101">p. 101</a></span></p> + +<p>The Chief's home was an entirely different sort of +affair from the other dwellings. It was noted that, +the homes of the ordinary people were made singularly +like those of the tribes on Wonder Island, usually +of twigs braided and brought together at the +upper end so as to form cone-like enclosures, and all +were covered with clay, so as to keep out the rains.</p> + +<p>Outside of these houses appeared to be the sleeping +quarters, and a glance at some of them impressed +George as being exceedingly filthy. The houses +were intended only for the rainy season, apparently, +as was the custom in many places on their own +island.</p> + +<p>But the Chief's dwelling was a most pretentious +affair, judged by the surrounding homes. It had a +large interior court, without a roof, but the immediate +dwelling had four or more rooms. The Chief +walked through one room, and entered the court, +where George was embarrassed to see two girls, and +several boys, together with three women, all of whom +stared at him, the girls giggling exactly as he had +seen them do at home.</p> + +<p>The articles taken from him were then deposited +upon the floor, and the Chief reclined on a sort of +raised couch. George glanced around and the first +thing that his eyes met was a chair, in one corner of +the room, and then some articles that he knew could +not have been made on the island.</p> + +<p>This was his introduction to the home of the Chief. +He then fell to wondering how it would be possible +to talk and tell him about his friends.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102">p. 102</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Scouting</span> in an unknown country, with assurances +that foes may be in ambush at every turn, is not a +rapid way of marching. Ordinarily, in the open +road, a man will walk three or four miles an hour. +But in a forest, where every tree may conceal a foe, +it is quite different.</p> + +<p>Muro was an expert in scouting work. He had +had years of experience in this sort of life, and, +moreover, was a chief of one of the most powerful +tribes on the island.</p> + +<p>He and his companion went directly east, in the +most stealthy fashion, and, a half mile beyond they +circled to the south, next swinging around to the +north, so as to take in as wide a sweep as possible.</p> + +<p>Before dark they obtained the first real traces of +the tramp of feet, and as it was now too late to enable +them to follow up the trail they went back toward +the scene of the capture, so that they might +thus be able to follow the trail easily the next morning.</p> + +<p>It was very dark when they crept in and were +halted by the sentries which John had posted. +Harry was the first to greet Muro. "Have you +found anything?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103">p. 103</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Muro. "We know the direction +they have gone. In the morning we can go on from +the place where we discovered the trail."</p> + +<p>"How far is it from here?"</p> + +<p>"More than ten miles."</p> + +<p>The distance mentioned was in itself sufficient evidence +that Muro had not wasted time.</p> + +<p>They spent the remaining hours of the evening +awaiting further news and it was fully ten o'clock +before the sentry to the south reported the probable +approach of Uraso. Harry leaped out from the +circle, and followed the sentry. It was, indeed, +Uraso who had been reporter.</p> + +<p>"Tell me all about it," he requested, and Harry, +with a voice full of pathos, told him how it happened. +When he had finished, Uraso said:</p> + +<p>"I was told by my father that somewhere here in +the seas was an island where were found most terrible +people, who killed every one they captured. I +hope this is not the place." And Uraso did not say +this to excite Harry's fears, but, like many natives, +he was frank, and open in his speech.</p> + +<p>"I hope there will be no trouble," was Harry's +response.</p> + +<p>"We need not worry about George," added Uraso. +"The way that he was taken shows that they are taking +him to the Chief. A boy like George would be +likely to interest the Chief, at first for a time, and +time is all we want."</p> + +<p>"I am glad you have the same opinion as John," +answered Harry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104">p. 104</a></span></p> + +<p>John, Muro and Uraso held a conference that +night. As a result Harry was comforted to know +and feel that George was safe, and that within a +day or two at most, they would be able to come up +with the tribe.</p> + +<p>The entire party now numbered thirty-five, all well +armed. In the morning, as soon as it was light +enough to see they were up, and after a quick breakfast +Muro directed them along the trail made the +night before, and the spot where Muro found the +trace was reached about nine o'clock.</p> + +<p>John and his party now spread out so as to take +in a wide expanse, and they marched toward the east +for fully two hours. Sometimes all traces would be +lost, and then there would be a halt and a search, and +the native wit of the scouts was generally acute +enough to recover the trail.</p> + +<p>During these periodical searches, one of the men +bounded forward with a cry, as he held up a hand in +which something was swinging.</p> + +<p>As usual Harry was there like a shot. "That is +George's chain," he cried out.</p> + +<p>"Where did you find this?" asked John.</p> + +<p>The scout rushed over to the place, and all followed. +The ground about plainly showed the evidences +of the struggle where George's captors fought +for the possession of the watch.</p> + +<p>The trail was beginning to get warm. It was readily +followed for several miles, and then disappeared, +but after patient hunting it came to light, and shortly<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105">p. 105</a></span> +after noon the spot was reached where the Chief +came on the scene, and the appearance of the ground +indicated that there must have been a large number +in the party.</p> + +<p>Here was an occasion where one great quality of +many savage tribes stands out so prominently, and +that is in determining the number of their enemies by +the foot prints. Hundreds of imprints on the soil, +crossing and recrossing each other, will to the untrained +seem a hopeless riddle.</p> + +<p>On one occasion on Wonder Island, John stated +that one of a party they were trailing, was wounded +in one of his legs. The explanation was simple: +The pressure of the foot in the soil was less on the +lame than on the sound leg, and the stride was uneven.</p> + +<p>But the scouts had to decipher the peculiar imprint +of each foot, and then compare it with all the +others, in turn.</p> + +<p>"I could tell the difference in the shape of a shoe +from another," said Harry, "but I do not see how it +is possible to tell one foot print from another."</p> + +<p>"How do you distinguish people?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Well, usually, by their faces."</p> + +<p>"Quite true. Now feet are just as different as +faces are. But there are other ways by which we +recognize people."</p> + +<p>"Yes," was the response. "I can tell who many +people are at distances so great that I cannot see +their faces."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106">p. 106</a></span></p> + +<p>"How do you do that?"</p> + +<p>"By the way they walk, by their size, or by some +action that seems to be peculiar to them."</p> + +<p>"The observations are correct," answered John. +"At the same time, if all the men you knew happened +to be in a crowd, and moving around among +each other, you would be able to recognize and place +each without any difficulty; is not that true!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and I think I understand the trend of your +remark now."</p> + +<p>"And what is that?"</p> + +<p>"You mean to say that if the scouts are able to +read, or to become acquainted with the foot prints, +they can read them as readily as I would read the +faces of my friends."</p> + +<p>"That is the exact inference I wish to draw."</p> + +<p>"Well, I want to see that done," and Harry followed +up Uraso, and watched Muro, and the most intelligent +of the scouts, while they carefully stepped +over the ground, each being careful while doing so +to step in the foot marks of the preceding scout.</p> + +<p>"That is a curious thing to do," he remarked, as +he turned to John.</p> + +<p>"What is that?" the latter asked.</p> + +<p>"Stepping in the tracks made by the leader."</p> + +<p>"That is for the purpose of keeping the surface +of the ground absolutely the same as the tribe left +it."</p> + +<p>"Well the boys seem to understand detective work +pretty well."</p> + +<p>All of them laughed at this complimentary allu<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107">p. 107</a></span>sion, +as it must be understood that all the scouts +taken from the island had learned to speak the English +language, and some of them, like Uraso, were exceptionally +skilled.</p> + +<p>When the different ones had gone over the ground +thoroughly, John asked the opinion of the searchers.</p> + +<p>"From my count there must have been twenty-four," +remarked Uraso.</p> + +<p>Muro smiled, as he said: "Uraso is mistaken, +there are twenty-five." Uraso was not at all perturbed, +but walked over to the surveyed plot and +said: "The most prominent one is the fellow with +the spreading toes. See! here is his left foot. See +that broad foot is all around the place. This broad +foot with a toe missing, is another fellow; and here +are two with rather long feet, you can see them all +about, and they are, no doubt, active fellows."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is picking them out plainly enough," +remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>"But," continued Uraso, "I want you to look at +this foot. It is the largest I ever saw."</p> + +<p>"I am satisfied that fellow is the Chief," remarked +Muro.</p> + +<p>"There is evidence of that here too," said Uraso, +as Muro nodded his head.</p> + +<p>Harry looked on in bewilderment. "Assuredly +that is something new. How do you know <i>that</i>?" he +asked.</p> + +<p>"The best indication is," said Uraso, "that the +fellow with the big feet does very little walking, and +all the other fellows have danced about him."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108">p. 108</a></span></p> + +<p>Harry laughed, and was satisfied. "That was certainly +clever," he remarked. "But why shouldn't +they be clever. These boys are the finest and bravest +in the world," and Uraso and Muro smiled and +were happy at this encomium of the boy they all +loved so much.</p> + +<p>"The last foot I have counted is that little sawed-off +sample that has danced all around the edge; see +it here, and here!"</p> + +<p>Muro walked forward, and, stooping down, pointed +to the imprint of a shoe, said: "That is our boy's +shoe."</p> + +<p>Uraso laughed, as he admitted neglecting George's +presence in the crowd of prints. "But I have found +something else. George has had an interview with +the Chief. He has been making some explanations +to the Chief about his revolver."</p> + +<p>John smiled, and kept his eye on a tree to the +right.</p> + +<p>"And how do you know that?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>Uraso walked over to the tree, after picking up +something, and pointed to a cut-out in the side of the +tree. It was the mark of the bullet, and the circular +cut which George had made that John had observed, +and which had been noticed by Uraso and Muro.</p> + +<p>"The scene here looks very promising to me," said +John.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is better and better," remarked Muro.</p> + +<p>"But you haven't told us yet, how you know that +George was interviewing the Chief."</p> + +<p>"Come here and I will show you. Now look<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109">p. 109</a></span> +closely at the foot prints of George. Then observe +the indications as to the attitude of the Chief. +George goes up to the Chief. They turn around. +Here is a shell. Beyond is the tree where they had +the mark, and here are the tracks of the Chief and +George as they go up to the tree."</p> + +<p>Harry was now convinced. It must be said, however, +that many of the marks made were so illy-defined, +that it required extraordinary vision to observe +them, and this is what Harry marveled at.</p> + +<p>"What you say only proves the value of minute +observation," remarked John. "Those who are not +accustomed to see these things, can not detect what +are very plain markings. Sometimes a slightly torn +leaf, under certain conditions, will tell a story in itself,—just +such a commonplace and ordinary thing +as a ruptured leaf."</p> + +<p>The consensus of opinion was that there were fully +twenty-five in the party counting George, and it is +remarkable that when the matter was afterwards +investigated it was found that Uraso's count was +right.</p> + +<p>There were six in the party which took George, +twelve who surrounded the party before the Chief +arrived, and five more were with him when he came +up.</p> + +<p>Another consultation was held. John remarked: +"I am of the opinion that the people who have captured +George are not at all bad, or vindictive. +Therefore we must exercise care and not needlessly +injure any of them. I need not say that it is our<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110">p. 110</a></span> +purpose here to aid the people, to make friends of +them, and not enemies."</p> + +<p>"That is in accordance with our wish," said +Uraso, with the approval of all present.</p> + +<p>"It is perfectly evident that these people, in taking +George, did what most people in a savage condition +would do. The great and overshadowing trait +in humanity is to acquire something. It is just possible +that the cartridge belt, or the field glasses, or +the buttons on his coat were of more importance to +them than George himself."</p> + +<p>"Then you mean they had to get George to get +the buttons," said Harry, laughing in his relief.</p> + +<p>"Of course," answered John, and Muro laughed +aloud, as he recalled his first experiences with the +boys.</p> + +<p>"John has hit upon the very thing which is at the +bottom of the whole business. All we wanted was +to get the trinket, and the prisoner belonged to the +Chief."</p> + +<p>"Or to the Krishnos," remarked Muro.</p> + +<p>"Well we might as well go on if we can find the +trail," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is plain enough now," answered one of +them.</p> + +<p>"But let us exercise caution," remarked John. +"Move along slowly and keep a sharp lookout on our +flanks."</p> + +<p>Harry was walking by the side of Uraso. There +had always been a warm friendship between the two. +Lolo, Uraso's favorite son, was Harry's age, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111">p. 111</a></span> +two were companions, and this was a source of great +joy to the Chief, for Uraso was the head man of the +Osagas, and one of the most progressive of all the +prominent men.</p> + +<p>Harry was dangling the chain which had been +found in the morning. "I have been wondering why +he dropped this!" he asked.</p> + +<p>"I have an idea that it was lost in the fight for +the possession of the watch."</p> + +<p>"The fight? Why did they have a fight?"</p> + +<p>"Well, the ground where the chain was found +looked very much like it."</p> + +<p>"I don't see why the fellows don't agree to divide +up things properly when they get them, instead of +scrambling for them in that way!"</p> + +<p>"You can see it is perfectly natural for them to +fight for it under the circumstances. They do not +understand anything but power."</p> + +<p>"I should think the loser would be resentful, and +try to even it up on the other fellow," remarked +Harry.</p> + +<p>"On the other hand, the moment the stronger fellow +wins, that is the end of the dispute. The best +one won. In his creed there is no other argument. +That is the savage's religion. You people have told +us differently. The Professor has often said: +'There is only this difference between us, with you, +might is right; with us right is might.'"</p> + +<p>"Well, what do you really think about it now?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>Uraso did not smile, as he remarked somewhat<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112">p. 112</a></span> +sadly: "It took me a long time to understand that. +How could right be might? At first it looked foolish, +and Muro and I talked it over many times. Then +Oma, and Tastoa and Oroto, the other Chiefs, spoke +to me about it. But while I did not understand it I +had faith in the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Then we went to Unity, and built the town, and +the people began to go there, and when we saw the +Professor, and the way he treated every one, never +doing a wrong to anybody, we could not believe that +he was sane. But everywhere we went we heard +people talking about him, and the way he acted, and +we saw all the white people do the same as the Professor +did, we noticed that no one would dare say a +word against the Professor, or John.</p> + +<p>"We marveled at that. The Professor went out +among the people of all the tribes, and never carried +a weapon of any kind. But no one would have dared +to injure him. If a man had even attempted to injure +him the people would have torn him to pieces. +Then I understood. Right was and is <i>Might</i>, but it +takes a savage a long time to understand it, and he +must learn it from something practical that comes to +him in every day life; he will never know it in any +other way."</p> + +<p>Harry walked on in silence.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113">p. 113</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">We</span> must now return to George and see how he +fared during the first night of his captivity. After +the Chief had seated himself, and had begun to examine +the articles taken from George, the latter had +an opportunity to examine the surroundings more +closely.</p> + +<p>The Chief made no remarks to him, nor did he ask +him to be seated. At the moment he entered the +room he noticed the chair. As the Chief did not pay +any attention to him after they entered, George +walked over and deliberately sat down on it.</p> + +<p>The two attendants who carried in the articles, +stared at him, and the women and children, particularly +the latter, seemed to be paralyzed at his attitude +seated in the chair. It was covered with dust, +an evidence that it was never used for the purposes +of a seat. On reflection, he thought that must be +the reason they looked at him so queerly.</p> + +<p>The Chief, however, gave no indication that his act +was a rude or questionable one. He tried on the +cartridge belt, but it was far too short for his corpulent +body, and George could hardly repress a laugh, +as he noticed the attempt to adjust it.</p> + +<p>The field glasses came in for a share of attention, +then the silver match box, and the women craned<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114">p. 114</a></span> +their heads forward, as it glittered. The Chief held +it off from his eyes, so he could properly view it; +just as George had often seen women do in trying to +match articles.</p> + +<p>All the while the Chief was emitting grunts betokening +pleasure and satisfaction. The adjusting +screw on the field glass next attracted his attention. +The turning moved the barrels in and out, and this +was, in all probability, the most remarkable thing he +ever saw.</p> + +<p>George could stand it no longer. He left his seat, +the younger children shrinking back as he arose, and +quietly walked to the Chief, and sat down in front +of him. As he did so he pointed to the match safe +which the Chief held in his left hand.</p> + +<p>The latter did not resist the attempt to take it, but +looked on wonderingly as George pressed the point, +and the lid flew open. Then, taking one of the +matches from the receptacle, he held the box in one +hand, exhibited the match in the other, for a moment, +and then drew the match across the box, and ignited +it.</p> + +<p>The Chief actually drew in a breath that was audible +everywhere in that neighborhood. He nodded +with approval. Harry closed the box and handed it +back; he then directed the Chief's attention to the +little point, and pressed it, when the lid again flew +open.</p> + +<p>This time the Chief closed it, and he pressed the +point. The success of the experiment was so great +that he eventually called his wife to witness it, for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115">p. 115</a></span> +she came over, while he performed the miraculous +thing.</p> + +<p>He took out a match. Its use was just as great +a mystery. He was taught just what to do, and the +primitive man sat there and struck the matches, one +after the other, in the greatest delight. What +amused George more than anything else was, that +every time a match was struck, he closed the box, +and then opened it before extracting another.</p> + +<p>George noted the imitative quality so marked in +all savages. It did not, apparently, occur to him +that he could strike two matches without the lid flying +open in the period intervening the two operations.</p> + +<p>It was now growing dark, and soon an attendant +came in with several curiously-arranged lights, made +from some sort of weed or vegetation, the smoke of +which appeared to be most agreeable. From an adjoining +room, an appetizing odor reached George +and, staring in that direction, the Chief noticed the +boy's expectant attitude.</p> + +<p>The Chief arose, his mighty frame towering above +the rest, and a command was given. Almost immediately +two servitors came through the opening, +one of them carrying a large bowl of the most savory +stew. The bowl was not of native manufacture, +and George, observing this, suddenly remembered +what John had said, that the Chief was always sure +to get the best and most valuable parts of the wreckages +along the shore, and he felt sure that this was +salvage from some shipwreck.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116">p. 116</a></span></p> + +<p>The Chief smiled, as the bowl was set before him. +It was smoking hot, and George smiled back as he +noticed the friendly look, and saw that the Chief's +wife graciously arranged the accompanying vegetables, +although he had no idea what the latter were.</p> + +<p>A second attendant brought pointed sticks, and +two paddle-shaped blades. The Chief without ceremony +dived into the mess and speared a piece of the +meat, and waved it to and fro, to cool it. Here was +an opportunity to follow the example thus set, and +George was glad to take the hint.</p> + +<p>He didn't look around to inquire for a plate, nor +did he ask for a napkin. The meat was good, the +vegetables appetizing, and the conversation lagged +so much that there was no chance for unseasonable +interruptions during the meal.</p> + +<p>If George had never before that hour witnessed +a savage eat, he would have been mortified at the +small amount he himself was capable of putting +away, when he compared the relative amounts consumed. +He was of the opinion, before they began, +that the bowl was intended for the whole family, but +the Chief ate all of it, except the small part that +George disposed of in the meantime.</p> + +<p>But he was perfectly content. He ate until he +could eat no more, and then to his extreme disgust, +a wooden platter of fruit was set before them. +Bananas were the only things he recognized. A +small pear-shaped fruit attracted him, and then an +egg-shaped, brown-colored fruit, with a sweet, strong +perfume, was among the varieties.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117">p. 117</a></span></p> + +<p>The Chief was graciousness itself, exhibiting not +one trait of selfishness, as he forced the fruit on +George. When the Chief had finished the fruit +George was relieved, but uncomfortable. He had +eaten beyond his capacity. The articles containing +the food were removed, and the Chief, who, during +this time, was in a reclining position, slowly sank +down, and was soon asleep.</p> + +<p>The family sat around for a time, and then all +slowly disappeared and he could hear the jumble of +voices in the adjoining apartment, as they were undoubtedly +engaged in their meal.</p> + +<p>What a peculiar position to be placed in. Alone +with the sleeping savage! Still, he did not seem to +be so very savage. There was no one in sight. He +arose and walked toward the opening. Not even a +guard prevented him from leaving.</p> + +<p>He stepped out. He still had his revolver, but that +was all. Now was the time to effect his escape. He +turned the corner of the main structure, and there +stood one of the Chief's girls, the one who had attracted +George's attention when he was first ushered +into the palace, as George named the place in his +mind.</p> + +<p>As this girl will have an important place in reciting +this history, it may be well to describe her. +She was about the height of George, with a much +lighter skin than the majority of those whom he had +seen thus far. Her eyes were large and beautiful, +and while her hair, intensely black and very profuse, +was not at all kinky. It should be said that the sav<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118">p. 118</a></span>ages +on the island, like those on Wonder Island, +while dark, did not have curly hair of the Ethiopian, +so that they were not of the negroid type but more +nearly allied to the Malay family.</p> + +<p>She smiled, and George, abashed for the moment, +went up to her, and she did not at all shrink from +him. Now that he had made the advance he was at +a loss what to do. The only thing that both perfectly +understood, was to smile, and smile they did.</p> + +<p>But why not say something. He tried it, and +those great eyes appeared to open still wider. +George turned and waved his hand, and affrighted, +apparently, she darted into the side entrance. The +darkness prevented him from seeing what was there, +and he dared not enter. The moon was shining +brightly.</p> + +<p>The desire to escape again took possession of him. +But why try to escape? He felt sure the Chief meant +no harm, and then he wandered to the other side of +the building, and there lay the great ocean, the shore +of which was not a thousand feet away.</p> + +<p>He sat down on a log, and pondered and, feeling +fatigued from the unusual efforts of the day, he lay +down for a nap. How long he remained there it was +impossible to tell, for when he awoke, he found himself +by the side of the trunk, and near him two of +the body guard who accompanied the Chief the day +before.</p> + +<p>He sat up, rubbed his eyes, arose, and without any +suggestion or command on the part of the watchers, +marched back to the Chief's palace, and entered the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119">p. 119</a></span> +room to see the latter awake and reclining at his +place on the floor.</p> + +<p>He offered a salutation to George, and the latter +smiled and bowed graciously. One of the attendants +touched him on the arm, and he was led to a room, +adjoining the court; but there was no door, by means +of which he could close the room, nor did he discover +a window, or anything suggesting an opening at the +other side of the apartment.</p> + +<p>A delightful odor came from some kind of grass +which was piled in one corner. He examined it, and +concluded that it had been placed there for his particular +benefit. This was indeed a thoughtful thing +on the Chief's part. They were making a home for +him, that was evident.</p> + +<p>But he was too tired to reflect long on these things. +Without removing his clothes he threw himself down +on the sweet, clean grass, and he knew no more until, +when the morning sun flooded the court, he could peer +out, and see the family moving to and fro, but the +Chief was nowhere in sight.</p> + +<p>While they had not ventured to tell him what was +just the correct thing to do, he walked out, and then +wandered to the open portal at the front. No one +seemed to heed him. He walked down toward the +ocean, and saw some women carrying water in curiously-shaped +gourds.</p> + +<p>He followed the path, which led to a spring; delicious, +cool and refreshing. Then he bathed his +face, and washed his hands. But he missed the soap. +He had not, however, forgotten the early days on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120">p. 120</a></span> +Wonder Island, when the Professor found the soap +tree.</p> + +<p>He glanced around. There, sure enough, was the +identical bush, and breaking off several twigs, the +small branches were crushed up together with the +leaves, and with these he returned to the brook and +had a good soap wash.</p> + +<p>This peculiar action was witnessed by some of the +women, and the tale was quickly told, and became +current in the village. When George visited the +same spot, the bush had entirely disappeared.</p> + +<p>The Chief had not returned when he went back, +but his breakfast was ready, and the maiden with +the great round eyes, and the mother, evidently, +waited on him.</p> + +<p>George looked toward the Chief's place. She understood, +and pointed to the west. He mused awhile. +What could she mean! It must not be supposed that +during all this time George was not thinking of +Harry, and John, and the boys who came over with +them on this trip.</p> + +<p>They always called each other "boys." All the +natives on Wonder Island were boys to them, and it +was amusing to hear them say the word in return. +They were all boys, Uraso, and Muro, as well; all +but the Professor, John and Blakely.</p> + +<p>When George went out after breakfast he was surprised +to note the absence of the men. No one but +women and children were about. Then the truth +flashed on him. The Chief had gone out, on hearing +of the approach of John and his party.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121">p. 121</a></span></p> + +<p>He rushed out toward the western path that led +from the village, and he had not gone three hundred +yards before the men, all armed with spears, came +back, with the Chief at their head. All were in consternation.</p> + +<p>George knew what this meant now. He held up +his hand as they hurriedly moved toward him, and +pointed to the west. He did this smiling to assure +him of the friendly character of the visit. The +Chief stopped. George moved through the group +and beckoned the Chief to follow.</p> + +<p>He hesitated but a moment, and then gave the necessary +command. Coming through the forest beyond +were John and the "Boys." When they were +still too far for hailing distance George raised his +hat and waved it.</p> + +<p>When John and his party were still a hundred +yards away, they stopped at the unusual sight. +Meanwhile George and the Chief moved on. Harry +could not restrain himself, and broke from the party, +in his mad rush to welcome George.</p> + +<p>"Bow, Harry; bow; he is a dandy Chief."</p> + +<p>Harry obediently made a gracious bow, and the +Chief acknowledged the salute.</p> + +<p>All that Harry could say, was: "Oh, George!"</p> + +<p>John and the company came up, and George +rushed to John, as he said: "I have had the nicest +time in the world, but I am afraid the Chief does +not know whether you are friends or enemies."</p> + +<p>John turned to the men, and quietly said: "This +man is a friend, and we must treat him as a Chief.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122">p. 122</a></span> +All give him a respectful greeting." The Chief stood +still, as all the warriors ranged themselves in front +and all bowed low, to the obvious relief of the savage.</p> + +<p>Then John brought Uraso and Muro forward, and +by well timed gestures indicated to the Chief that +they were also Chiefs, and he instantly showed that +he recognized the pantomimic language, and deferentially +bowed, as he had seen George do.</p> + +<p>Uraso stepped forward and went up to the burly +form, and pressed his nose against his nose. Then, +he spoke a few words. The Chief looked at him for +a moment, and then answered. Muro was not slow +to follow the example, and he also addressed the +Chief.</p> + +<p>When Uraso turned and took John's hand and in +a dialect, which both seemed to understand, he told +about John and the boys, the Chief turned to his +men and said a dozen words, which were instantly +recognized by Uraso and Muro. They smiled.</p> + +<p>"What did he say?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"He told them to go to the village and prepare +food."</p> + +<p>All but a half dozen of the immediate followers of +the Chief turned and darted back to the village.</p> + +<p>"Do you know the Chief's language?" asked +Harry, as Uraso gave way to Muro.</p> + +<p>"We can understand each other pretty well. +There are many words which are the same, but he +uses some which are new to me."</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose they are the same people as are +on our island?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123">p. 123</a></span></p> + +<p>"I do not know that. We have heard that all the +people in the different islands came from the same +place, but where we do not know."</p> + +<p>Then the boys crowded around George, and insisted +on having him tell his story. Did you ever +hear a boy tell a thrilling story of his own adventures? +Well George was in his heaven of delight as +he told of his treatment, and how he had dined with +the Chief, and slept in his palace.</p> + +<p>"His palace?" queried Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes, palace! It isn't a common house!" And +George dilated on it to such an extent that Harry +actually grew envious at the big time that George +had at their expense.</p> + +<p>The party wended its way down the hill, and when +the village was reached the sight there astounded +George. He had left it a sleepy place. Now all +was bustle. Fires were being built; the men and +women were busy preparing food. A species of hog, +well known on Wonder Island, was being prepared +and spitted, and hung over the heated coals.</p> + +<p>They saw the favorite native vegetable, the Taro +root, and also, to their surprise, an abundance of +Uraso's poison bulb, the Amarylla, which he had +tried to prepare in stealth after he had been captured, +and the telling of which was the occasion of +many jokes at the expense of George and Harry.</p> + +<p>John, the two boys, together with Uraso and Muro, +were ushered into the Chief's house.</p> + +<p>"And this is what you call a 'palace'?" remarked +Harry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124">p. 124</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"From your description I thought it might be on +top of a big hill with graded steps leading up between +rows of flowers, and the rooms filled with statuary, +with a large fountain playing in the center of +a fine banquet hall."</p> + +<p>George laughed at the joke. "The trouble with +you is that you are not a philosopher, Harry. If +you had been as well treated as I have been you +would think the same as I do."</p> + +<p>John overheard the conversation, and remarked: +"I must say that there is more philosophy in that +view than even you, George, appreciate."</p> + +<p>"Have I said anything unusual?" he asked with +a sort of mock gravity.</p> + +<p>"Quite so; have you ever heard the saying 'Handsome +is, as handsome does'? Well, that is the root +of all true actions in life. From the noble manner in +which this Chief treated George, giving him the best +that he had, and installing him in the finest room +in the house, is doing all that any one can do."</p> + +<p>"That is the way I really felt about it at the time. +I was tired and hungry, and instead of meeting an +enemy, I met a friend."</p> + +<p>"Do you see, Harry? George did right in calling +this a palace. If it so appears in his heart, and he +feels that impulse, isn't that just as real as though +you see it with your eyes?"</p> + +<p>"I didn't think of it in that way," said Harry, +apologetically. "I like the old fellow. He is good +enough to be a white man."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125">p. 125</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Within</span> an hour the feast was ready, and the men +in the open were already making merry with the +maidens who prepared the meal. George and Harry +frequently nudged each other, as they caught the +eyes of some of the native boys who were very attentive +to the gentler sex.</p> + +<p>Within the Chief's dwelling there was the most +animated conversation indulged in by the Chief, +Uraso and John, and to this number were added the +Chief's brother, and a handsome man who was probably +one of the Chief's principal advisors. Muro +and Uraso were the interpreters.</p> + +<p>The latter, by turns, told the Chief where they +sailed from, and what their history had been for the +past three years. They told about the wonderful +Professor, and all concerning John, and what part +the two boys had taken in the transformation of the +island.</p> + +<p>"But where is this wonderful ship?" asked the +Chief.</p> + +<p>"On the other side of the island," answered Uraso.</p> + +<p>"Then why do you not bring it here?"</p> + +<p>"We should have done so, but we did not know we +had a friend here."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126">p. 126</a></span></p> + +<p>"I want to see the wonderful place you have told +me about,—your home, and how you make people +happy," said the Chief.</p> + +<p>John's face lit up when this was interpreted to +him.</p> + +<p>"What do your people work at?" the Chief +abruptly asked Muro.</p> + +<p>"We make many curious things, like the articles +you have here," and he pointed to George's belongings, +which were still lying about.</p> + +<p>The Chief hurriedly gathered them up and handed +them to George. The latter, after turning to John, +refused to take them, and addressing Uraso, said: +"Tell him that I want him to take them, and my gun, +as well."</p> + +<p>The Chief could not understand this, and at first +refused, but John, as well as Uraso, insisted, and the +latter said:</p> + +<p>"These boys can make these things, and they do +not feel that they are sacrificing anything, beyond +what it is their duty to do."</p> + +<p>The Chief looked doubtfully at the boys, as he +remarked: "Do you tell me that these <i>memees</i>, +(Boys) made these things?"</p> + +<p>Uraso and Muro both assured them that such was +the case, and added: "And still more wonderful +things."</p> + +<p>After some conversation Uraso turned to John +and said: "The Chief wishes to send a runner to +bring the ship to the harbor here. Hasmo may accompany +him."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127">p. 127</a></span></p> + +<p>This arrangement had John's approval, and when +Hasmo was advised of the mission, he jumped up +with delight, and, together with the Chief's fleetest +messenger, speeded off to make the intervening +twenty-five miles.</p> + +<p>It was not much of a task for the two men. In +less than four hours, Sutoto saw two men on the +shore, one of them waving a signal that he understood. +A boat was put off, and when the runners +came aboard, and the news imparted, all on board +sprang to their places, the anchor was hurriedly +taken up, and the <i>Pioneer</i> soon rounded the point, +while they all eagerly scanned the shore.</p> + +<p>The Chief and his visitors remained in the "palace" +for three hours, while the latter told and retold +the stories which so much interested the chieftain. +Then John began to question him upon matters that +more nearly concerned their visit.</p> + +<p>"Ask him," he said, "if they have any Krishnos +here?"</p> + +<p>"He does not know what they are," answered +Muro.</p> + +<p>"Does he believe in a Great Spirit?"</p> + +<p>"No he has never heard anything of that kind."</p> + +<p>"Ask him if he knows who makes the rain and the +sunshine, and the clouds."</p> + +<p>"He says that the questions are surprising to +him."</p> + +<p>"Has he never thought of those things?"</p> + +<p>"No; all he knows is that he lives and that he is +a Chief and is the one who must govern the people."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128">p. 128</a></span></p> + +<p>"Does he know why he is the Chief?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; because he is stronger than any one else."</p> + +<p>"That would certainly make him a Chief," remarked +Harry. "I never saw such a big man."</p> + +<p>"Do they have any big holes in the ground!"</p> + +<p>When the question was asked he waited a moment, +and then slowly shook his head.</p> + +<p>"They have nothing of that kind to his knowledge."</p> + +<p>The countenances of Harry and George fell. John +noticed it, and smiled at the disappointment.</p> + +<p>"There are no caves around here," said George.</p> + +<p>"Are there any mountains on the island?"</p> + +<p>"There are high hills."</p> + +<p>"Have they any neighbors, or different tribes?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; to the north, (pointing in that direction) +are some bad people, but they belong to him."</p> + +<p>"Why do they not live near to the village!"</p> + +<p>"Because they would make the people bad."</p> + +<p>"What did they do that was so bad?"</p> + +<p>"They stole and lied."</p> + +<p>"From whom did they steal?"</p> + +<p>"From the Chief."</p> + +<p>"Did they steal from each other?"</p> + +<p>"No; they could not steal from each other."</p> + +<p>At this remark the boys laughed. John began +to be interested now in his questionings.</p> + +<p>"Do you mean it is not wrong to steal from each +other, but only from the Chief?"</p> + +<p>He nodded an assent. This was a curious bit of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129">p. 129</a></span> +reasoning. It needed some explanation. John continued:</p> + +<p>"Why is it wrong to steal from the Chief and not +from each other?"</p> + +<p>At this question the Chief did not answer as +promptly as usual. He weighed the question in his +mind. He smiled as though to say: How can it +be wrong for people to take things from each other? +They do not own anything. No one but the Chief +owns things.</p> + +<p>His answer, when finally given, was not at all +clear, at least so the boys thought.</p> + +<p>"The Chief in his wisdom gives to all alike; and +when he gives it the property still belongs to him and +not the people; but if they take it from the Chief then +they are robbers."</p> + +<p>"Ask him," said John, "whether, if when he gives +anything to one of his people, and it still belongs to +him, after he gives it, why it is not stealing from +him, if some one takes it away from the one he gave +it to?"</p> + +<p>The Chief was not at all taken aback at this question. +Pointing to the sun, he said:</p> + +<p>"That is a great Chief. He gives seed to the people, +and they plant it. But the great Chief does not +forget it. The seed comes up to see its father. It +still belongs to him. When he gives that seed to the +people it is for their use. Every one has a right to +take it and use it, and it is no crime. But if he takes +it away from the Chief, he destroys what belongs to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130">p. 130</a></span> +him, and he then does a wrong which must be punished."</p> + +<p>"This may not be very clear to you," said John, +"but it means that whoever takes it away and destroys +it wilfully, is guilty of a crime. Whatever +the Great Chief gives willingly, like the fruits of the +earth, is intended for all alike, and men should not +be called criminals for taking what they need, if +they do not wilfully destroy it."</p> + +<p>"That is a wonderful idea, when I come to think +of it," remarked George. "And to think that a savage +could work that out in his mind."</p> + +<p>"But there is one thing that looks a little queer +to me. He said he did not know or believe in a +Great Spirit, and yet he talks of the sun as a Great +Spirit," remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>"I will put the question to him," said John. +"You said that you did not believe in a Great Spirit, +but now you speak about the sun as a Great Chief. +Do you not believe in him?"</p> + +<p>"No; I only know that he is there; I do not believe +in him any more than in the carago (moon)."</p> + +<p>A great noise was heard outside; the Chief looked +up, as an attendant entered. He spoke to Uraso, +and the latter turned to John and said:</p> + +<p>"Our ship is coming."</p> + +<p>This announcement broke up the interview. It +was exciting and interesting from first to last, and +when they emerged from the dwelling the host and +visitors were friends that the future never could +sever. It gave a new inspiration to the boys, and it<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131">p. 131</a></span> +showed them that even a low state of man was capable +of expressing things that were worthy of consideration.</p> + +<p>The entire village went to the seashore. The inhabitants +wondered at the great vessel, and were impressed +at the manner in which it was handled.</p> + +<p>"I am anxious to see the man who can row such +a vessel," said the Chief.</p> + +<p>"He is one of the men from our island," answered +Muro.</p> + +<p>This seemed to be an astonishing thing to him. +He had seen vessels before, but in the distance. At +long intervals parts of ships had come ashore; but +this was the first time that a vessel had ever landed, +within his recollection.</p> + +<p>As it drew near he marveled at its size. He could +see the man at the bow-sprit who was constantly +throwing something attached to a line overboard, +and then drawing it in again.</p> + +<p>He questioned the reason for such a strange action, +and was told that the man was trying the depth of +the water, so that they might not come too close to +the shore, and strike the bottom. Then some of the +sailors dropped something overboard, with a great +splash, and a huge sail fell down like magic, and the +ship still moved toward the shore and turned around.</p> + +<p>The Chief was inquisitive concerning every action. +Why did the ship act like a human and turn around? +He could hardly believe the statement when told that +the anchor was a giant claw, and that when it reached +the bottom it took hold and had sufficient strength<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132">p. 132</a></span> +to stop the ship and make it swing around, as he had +witnessed.</p> + +<p>A boat was lowered, and the last one to descend +was Sutoto. Uraso pointed out his figure, and the +Chief kept his eyes on him. The first man to leave +the boat was Sutoto, and both boys rushed down to +meet him. It was the course they always pursued, +to be in the lead to welcome anyone.</p> + +<p>They led him to the Chief, and he put his great +arms about Sutoto, to the latter's great embarrassment. +But what affected Sutoto more than anything +else, were the eyes of the Chief's daughter, +who had acted so shyly to George the night before. +From that moment Sutoto saw no one else, and she,—well, +Harry and George laughed, and slyly caressed +Sutoto, as they saw her admiring glances.</p> + +<p>Sutoto was the handsomest native on Wonder Island. +He was the brave and fleet runner who undertook +the mission to pass through the three savage +tribes to carry a message, written on a plaintain leaf +by the Professor, to John and the boys while they +were surrounded by the hostiles.</p> + +<p>The friendship between him and the boys grew +stronger and better from that day on. The tribute +to him was one which the boys enjoyed for his sake, +and because he deserved it.</p> + +<p>There was a feast that night, unparalleled in the +knowledge of the boys. It was like going to a new +world, and meeting new people. Only one little thing +seemed to mar the joyous occasion for the boys for a +time. When they were returning from the beach,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133">p. 133</a></span> +they saw three of the natives, together with their +wives and children, with their hands bound, and in +charge of a half dozen warriors.</p> + +<p>George recognized the three as his captors. Then +was impressed upon him the fact that they were +about to pay the penalty for stealing his things and +hiding the theft from the Chief. They were to be +exiled to the place where the bad people lived.</p> + +<p>George hurriedly told Uraso the story of the theft, +and begged him to intercede with the Chief. Instantly, +when he learned that George requested it, he +turned to Uraso, and said: "He may release +them."</p> + +<p>He rushed up to the now bewildered culprits, in +order to sever the bonds, and then recalling that he +had given his knife to the Chief, he called to Harry, +and together they freed the limbs of the captives and +the Chief, with a few words of admonition, dismissed +them. The boys never forgot the grateful looks that +came from the men and their wives.</p> + +<p>When they had departed Muro said: "Under +their law the women and children of the culprits are +criminals also, and so they were doomed to go together."</p> + +<p>It would be a difficult matter to describe the food +prepared and eaten at this banquet. Several varieties +of fowl, all wild types, and the wild boar, as well +as the 'possum, provided the meats. Of course taro +and amarylla were the chief vegetables; and of nuts, +the well known Brazil species was found everywhere, +and to be seen in all dwellings.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134">p. 134</a></span></p> + +<p>The outer portion of the shell of the Brazil nut +formed bowls and cups, which the boys early learned +to utilize. There were bananas, a species of fig, and +loquats.</p> + +<p>"What surprises me is that they have no fish, or +sea food of any kind," observed Harry.</p> + +<p>John mused for a while, and then said: "It is +likely that the people here have the same aversion +to fish as some natives along the Australian continent, +and in the islands near there."</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"The natives of New Guinea, for instance, worship +snakes, lizards, sharks and crocodiles, and there is +a strict law among them not to injure anything, of +that kind. As a result, they are afraid to eat anything +that approaches the shape of these animals."</p> + +<p>"Well, if they worship the snakes they must have +some kind of religion," ventured Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and with them go the witch doctors who +practice on the people and charge fees just the same +as the physicians do in our country."</p> + +<p>"Do they claim there is a Great Spirit, like some +of the people here!"</p> + +<p>"No; they have a God called Baigona, who lives +in the mountains, and instead of being a good God, +is a bad one; he has the power to speak without being +heard, to strike without being seen, and he loves +and hates, just like human beings. He gives the +witch doctor the power to do anything, without being +wrong, and without being liable to punishment."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135">p. 135</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, that is a pretty convenient God to have," +said Harry, as he mused at the idea.</p> + +<p>The peculiar thing about the absence of sea food +at the banquet could not be understood, particularly +as the natives on Wonder Island were great fish eaters, +and were also the bitter enemies of snakes.</p> + +<p>"We must consult the Chief about that," said +John.</p> + +<p>At the first opportunity the subject was brought +up, and it was discovered that the people were afraid +to eat anything that came from the sea. And then +another thing was learned. There were no rivers of +any consequence on the island; only a few streams, +that were dry most of the year.</p> + +<p>"I can understand," said John, "that in such a +case you do not have fresh water fish."</p> + +<p>The Chief was, in many respects, a remarkable +character. Most natives are extremely superstitious, +and it is particularly true of those who have +a belief in some form of God. While he would marvel +at new things they did not occur to him as being +the result of some new occult force.</p> + +<p>In this respect he differed from the natives of +Wonder Island, all of whom believed, more or less, +in the tales of the Medicine Men, and of the witch +doctors. Old Suros, of the Berees tribe, was the +only one who did not believe in the existence of a +being who could rule him.</p> + +<p>But the Chief had other qualities which were remarkable +in a savage, if such he was. He governed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136">p. 136</a></span> +according to some law, and yet he did not know what +law was. The only thing in that community was the +will of that one man.</p> + +<p>If he said something, in adjusting any matter, it +was always remembered by the people, and that ruling +became a guide for them in the future. Take, +for instance, the theft of the articles from George. +The three who participated in it, knew that it was +not wrong, according to the light they had, to take +it from George.</p> + +<p>Indeed, the Chief had distinctly said that they +could not steal from each other, but only from him, +hence the theft of the articles which George owned +was not a crime. On what ground, then, were they +guilty?</p> + +<p>George thought he had solved the problem, when +discussing the matter with John. "The Chief found +them guilty of trying to hide what they had done, and +they were caught at it."</p> + +<p>"But the Chief was not covetous. He admitted he +did not care for the things, and one of the men told +Muro that the Chief never took things from his people +without paying for them."</p> + +<p>"Well, then, he punished them for trying to deceive +him."</p> + +<p>"There, that is one of the crimes which the Chief +referred to. I think he is a wonderful character, and +I hope we shall be able to unite him with us."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137">p. 137</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was plain that Sutoto was not the same being. +During the three days they remained at the port, and +formed the exploring expeditions into the interior, +with the co-operation of the Chief, Sutoto did not +take a part.</p> + +<p>He begged to be allowed to remain near the ship. +That was a sly suggestion which John understood. +Even though he might have been blind he would +have known the true reason, for the boys were continuously +joking Sutoto all of which he took good-naturedly, +and John often burst out in fits of laughter, +as he witnessed Sutoto's discomfiture.</p> + +<p>The Chief's name was Beralsee, and the big-eyed +maiden was known as Cinda, the meaning of which +was, as explained by Beralsee, the Beautiful Star. +The Chief had four other children, one a man of +twenty-one, and the others younger than Cinda.</p> + +<p>The eldest, Calmo, was tall and lithe, like Sutoto. +Like his father he was original in his ways, and to +him the Chief entrusted the care of the expeditions +which were made at the suggestion of John. The +latter explained that they had seen the wonderful +products growing on the island, coffee, cocoa, spices, +and particularly the various fibres.</p> + +<p>The recital of the tales, of how the white man used<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138">p. 138</a></span> +these things to make the various needed articles, and +how the great ships were employed to carry the +goods to and fro, and how the different things were +exchanged, interested him.</p> + +<p>Many of the subjects were not within his comprehension. +Why were all these things done? What +was the object of having so many products?</p> + +<p>John told him that when men had everything they +really needed to keep them alive and in comfort, they +still wanted something more, and those things were +called luxuries; then, after they and their children +used these luxuries for a while, they found them to +be absolutely essential and they then became necessaries. +In that way men learned the use of so +many, many things, that the whole world was being +searched to find products which would serve to make +the needed things.</p> + +<p>"Do you mean," said the Chief, "that your people +are trying to find things they do not need, so they +can buy them, and try to make some use of them?"</p> + +<p>John could not help but smile at the acuteness of +the question. "That, in effect, is just what they do. +It is not so considered, however, by our people. It +is difficult to say just where necessity ends and luxury +begins. But each year, yes every month, new +things are brought out, and people begin to buy +them, because the traders and the people who sell +are shrewd and know how to cultivate taste and the +desire for new and startling things."</p> + +<p>"But how do the people get the articles to exchange +for these things?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139">p. 139</a></span></p> + +<p>"The people do not accumulate articles to buy +other articles with. Instead, they work to get +money, and with this money they buy the things."</p> + +<p>"I do not know what you mean by that. What is +'money'?"</p> + +<p>"It is an article which tells what everything else +is worth."</p> + +<p>"Then it must be wonderful. I would like to see +that remarkable thing which can tell what everything +else is worth."</p> + +<p>John took some of the coins from his pocket. +"Here is some of it, which we use on Wonder Island."</p> + +<p>The Chief smiled. He held them in his hand. He +knew the meaning of the hole in the center. They +were intended, as he thought, to be threaded on a +string, and used as an ornament.</p> + +<p>They fascinated him. He had never seen anything +so attractive. He looked at John, while he +thought, but did not speak. Then John said: "This +is worth one cent, and this larger one five cents."</p> + +<p>He compared the two. Finally, he said: "What +makes this worth so much more than the other, and +why are they worth anything?"</p> + +<p>"Because there is so much metal,—so much copper, +in each."</p> + +<p>"But copper is of no use. I cannot eat it, and it +will not clothe me."</p> + +<p>"No, but if you have this money then you can get +the clothes, and the size of them will tell just how +much clothing you can get."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140">p. 140</a></span></p> + +<p>"I do not understand it. Where can I go and get +clothing with these round pieces!"</p> + +<p>"You must go where the clothing is, or the goods +must be brought to you."</p> + +<p>"Well, if we are here, at a place where there +should be no clothing, or no food, this <i>money</i>, as you +call it, would not enable me to clothe or feed myself?"</p> + +<p>"Assuredly not."</p> + +<p>"Then it has no value?"</p> + +<p>"No; it merely measures the value of something +which I can eat or wear, or use."</p> + +<p>"Then why not use a taro root, or a fowl, or wisps +of fibre?"</p> + +<p>"That would be all right, if we could have a common +understanding between us of how much a taro +bulb was worth by the side of a bundle of fibre, and +how large the bundle should be to exchange fairly +with an armful of Amarylla tubers."</p> + +<p>On the third day the boys, together with John, a +party of the boys, and three natives under the lead +of Calmo, started for the northern end of the island. +John had now learned that the island was +entirely unlike the Wonder Island formation.</p> + +<p>The latter was fairly circular in form, whereas the +one they were now about to explore was narrow and +long. That part of the southern portion which they +had carefully examined, in order to learn its agricultural +possibilities, was rolling, and in many places +had level plateaus, not anywhere at a greater altitude +than three or four hundred feet above sea level.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141">p. 141</a></span></p> + +<p>There was higher ground to the north, where the +climate was uninviting, so Beralsee said, and it was +for that reason they made it a convict colony.</p> + +<p>John was anxious to see the people who were exiled +from their homes on account of their crimes. +Furthermore, he was impressed with the idea that +the upper end showed volcanic upheavals, which +would be likely to expose mineral formations.</p> + +<p>Gruesome tales were current of the ferocity of the +convicts. It was no wonder that the poor victims, +whom George had prevented from being expelled +several days before, regarded their deliverance as +such a great blessing.</p> + +<p>No one, once condemned, was ever permitted to +come back. The condemnation was for all time. +Furthermore, it was part of the Chief's unwritten +code, that no one who transgressed the law could +ever make atonement, or recover his rights.</p> + +<p>To be able to meet people so condemned, and to +talk with them and get their views, was worth an +exertion, surely, and Harry and George were just as +enthusiastic at the prospects of the journey.</p> + +<p>"That may be some recompense for not finding +any caves," said George.</p> + +<p>Harry laughed, as he looked at George. "To hear +you talk people might think you had caves on the +brain."</p> + +<p>"Well the caves are the only thing that we have +had in the way of sport. And then the treasures!"</p> + +<p>"I know that; but I shall not be disappointed if +there isn't a cave within five hundred miles."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142">p. 142</a></span></p> + +<p>"Nor I; but John is very anxious, for some reason, +to find some particular cave. I'll bet anything +that skull we found on the southeast peak of Wonder +Island has something to do with it, judging by +the way he is caring for the skull, and spending +hours in examining it."</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten about that," responded Harry. +"That brings back my interest, now. But John does +not think there are any caves on this island, but he +believes that there is another island farther south."</p> + +<p>"Is that so!"</p> + +<p>"I am sure of it."</p> + +<p>"How sure?"</p> + +<p>"Well, the chart which John made has this island +on it, and a mark which shows something like it directly +to the south. I saw that several days ago."</p> + +<p>"When did he make the drawing?"</p> + +<p>"Since he has been on this island."</p> + +<p>Harry emitted a low whistle. "I thought John +had something in his mind all along. What do you +suppose he expects to find in that particular cave?"</p> + +<p>"Well, not money; that's sure. It might be a +good idea to do some thinking and searching on our +own account."</p> + +<p>"I have often wondered, since we have been on +Wonder Island, and more particularly, since we +landed here, whether it would not be possible to trace +some of the unsolved mysteries of Wonder Island to +this, or some other island."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have often thought of that. We have gone +over every part of that island, and found no trace<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143">p. 143</a></span> +of the other boat load, that is of the boys who came +ashore on the <i>Investigator's</i> No. 3. None of the +tribes ever knew or heard of that boat, nor was there +ever a trace of the members of that crew.</p> + +<p>"That is the mystery. Some one brought the boat +to the island. Some one took it inland. Some one, +a man by the name of Walter, wrote a note addressed +to Wright, who was one of the companions +of John when he was shipwrecked, but Wright knew +nothing of Walter. If the solution of this matter +does not lie in some other island, we might as well +give it up."</p> + +<p>Before describing the events of the journey it is +necessary to make a digression, so that we may be +able to recount some things which had a bearing on +the adventures and experiences of the two boys after +they returned.</p> + +<p>The natives on Wonder Island, as well as on the +island where they now were, wore the most primitive +kinds of clothing. The men had the simplest clothing, +merely a breech clout, worn about the loins, and +the Chiefs usually wore some distinguishing clothing +about their shoulders, and usually on their arms.</p> + +<p>The women, however, had short skirts, and like +their white sisters, abounded in ornaments. Some +of them had jackets, to which the trinkets were attached. +All delighted in bracelets. These were usually +formed like bands around their arms and limbs, +and the wealth and importance of the dame was +judged from the number so employed.</p> + +<p>As a result, when they became great and wealthy,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144">p. 144</a></span> +more and more clothing had to be used, to enable +them to attach the ornaments. It might be said, that +clothing was worn, not for the purpose of covering +the body, or for comfort, but in order to serve as a +vehicle to attach the much desired trinkets, and the +dangling character of these articles seemed to be the +great attraction.</p> + +<p>For this reason bright and sparkling bits of jewelry +were the most sought. It mattered not what +they were made of, but the glistening surface had its +value to them. Singularly enough, the women on the +new island strove to decorate themselves in like +manner, and presumably, for the same purpose.</p> + +<p>When the savages in Wonder Island were brought +out of their crude state, the Professor and George +knew that they could not change that fundamental +law of nature, nor did they attempt to work a revolution +in the minds and characters of the people in +this respect.</p> + +<p>Within certain limitations such a desire to ornament +and render themselves attractive is most laudable. +They knew that among the few peoples in the +world, where that quality is entirely lacking, they +are of the lowest type, and possessed of the least intellect, +and that all such are the hardest to cultivate.</p> + +<p>Here, as on Wonder Island, the natives understood +weaving, the fabrics being of the coarsest character, +both in the matter of quality and appearance. The +work was necessarily slow and tedious, and the principal +work of the women was to weave these articles +of wear with the simple tools they had.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145">p. 145</a></span></p> + +<p>When the boys built the looms, and the natives +saw the wonderful goods produced, and the dyes prepared +to give the fabrics the different hues, the +women became most expert weavers, and the natural +result was that they vied with each other to make the +best articles, and to form them into the most fashionable +garments.</p> + +<p>When the <i>Pioneer</i>, and later their new steamer, +<i>Wonder</i>, which was now regularly running to one of +the great seaports, began to bring in such products +as they could not make in the islands, a new impetus +was given to the dress designed for women.</p> + +<p>Before the boys left for Wonder Island, that place +attracted immigrants from the north; they brought +their families, and began to engage in the business of +exporting the fruits and the fibres, as well as the ores +and the dyes from the island. From the white +women the native women learned the new art of +dressing, and of adornment.</p> + +<p>Their coming was not needed to give them the desire, +but they were not slow to recognize that their +fair-skinned sisters could teach them the refining +process.</p> + +<p>Muro's wife was the sister of Uraso, the latter a +man of naturally strong intellect, and his sister was +not behind him in her particular domain. She was +at all times the leading spirit in the development of +her people, and to her the Professor imparted many +of the great secrets, that might be of service.</p> + +<p>Stut, the brother of Muro, was second in command +of the vessel, and before they left on the mis<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146">p. 146</a></span>sion +into the interior, John called in Stut, and in +presence of the boys imparted a scheme that met with +hearty approval.</p> + +<p>It was now an open secret that Sutoto and Cinda +were in love. If the Chief knew of it he did not exhibit +any alarm, or offer any objections. John knew +that courtships on the islands were not usually of +long duration. He thought it would be a fine thing +to make the wedding a "state affair."</p> + +<p>"Now, Stut, I want to entrust you with a mission +to the Professor and Muro's wife, to whom you can +explain the situation. She must prepare a suitable +outfit for the bride, and tell her I think she and the +other women that she might choose should also come +over. They must not forget to bring the proper +costumes for Cinda's mother and for all the attendants.</p> + +<p>"The Professor will know what is suitable to send +over for the Chief. All this will take some time to +arrange, and it must be done without letting Sutoto +know. I will arrange the matter with him so that he +will not suspect your real mission.</p> + +<p>"Our work at the northern part of the island will +take about ten days, and probably less. If you have +no trouble, and this time of the year is not a stormy +one, you can easily make the trip there in a day and +a half, and return in the same time, thus giving you a +full week to prepare the articles."</p> + +<p>Stut was in raptures at the announcement. John +knew that he was capable, and trusted him. Shortly +afterwards Sutoto was sent for, and John said: "It<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147">p. 147</a></span> +is necessary for the <i>Pioneer</i> to return to Wonder Island +to get some things of importance for us. It +would please me better to have you remain, and Stut +can take your place for the trip; but if you prefer +to go, it will be satisfactory."</p> + +<p>Sutoto hesitated for a moment. He eyed John for +a moment, and the boys begged him to remain. They +knew, as did John, that their entreaties were not necessary. +Finally, with a most suspicious glance, he +consented to stay. Stut was notified, and he came in.</p> + +<p>"Stut, I have some very valuable papers which +must be delivered to the Professor, who will send +some things back, and I have arranged with Sutoto +that he shall remain and help us in our investigations +here, while you sail the <i>Pioneer</i> to Unity."</p> + +<p>Stut looked at Sutoto for a moment, as though +taken by surprise, and announced his willingness to +go. "Then start at once," remarked John, "and return +as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>Sutoto called Stut aside, after they left John. +"Will you get some things for me?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, what can I do for you?"</p> + +<p>Then Sutoto imparted the secret of his coming +marriage to Stut, and the latter with well concealed +surprise, promised secrecy, and assured him that he +would get the clothing necessary and the particular +presents that seemed to be of more importance to +him than his garments.</p> + +<p>Within two hours the ship was ready, and as they +were leaving the vessel Stut told the boys of the commission +which he had undertaken at Sutoto's request.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148">p. 148</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> present journey reminded the boys of the +time when they began their wanderings in the unknown +wilds of their own island. Then they were inexperienced, +lacking the most ordinary knowledge of +life in the open, afraid of slightest noise when in unknown +places, and constantly fearing attack by wild +men or beasts.</p> + +<p>What a difference now! They had been successful, +and had abundant treasures at their command. +Something told them that they were to find still +greater treasures, and the zest was one beyond expression.</p> + +<p>The course was directed due north. The boys +knew that they were to investigate the mountains, +the hills and the streams. They were to learn what +fruits and vegetation might be found in their native +state on the island; the kinds and varieties of animals, +and the qualities of the minerals, if the geological +formations offered them for inspection.</p> + +<p>From the first day that they landed, the boys had +heard a peculiar guttural sound, impossible to describe. +The sound was almost annoying after they +had heard it for a time. Passing the limb of a tree +during the first hour of the march they heard the +same cry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149">p. 149</a></span></p> + +<p>"I see what it is," remarked George. "It is a +bird. See it on that limb?"</p> + +<p>John looked, and then turned to George. "Why +certainly, that is the Kagu."</p> + +<p>"Why its bill and feet are red, while the rest of +the body is gray. What +a funny feather it has +running back from its +head!"</p> + +<p>Harry laughed, as he +remarked: "I wonder if +our women took their +hat fashions from the +Kagu?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 180px;"> +<a id="illus-fig8" name="illus-fig8" /> +<a href="#p_149"> +<img src="images/illus-fig8-p149.png" width="180" height="234" +alt="Fig. 8. The Kagu." title="Fig. 8. The Kagu." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 8. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Kagu</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"You have made a correct +observation. Some +species of the hornbill +have feathers which project +up into the air like sentinels, and the same +feathers are used in exactly the same fashion by +makers of millinery. Now, I am not an authority on +the fashions, but I have often thought that if the +leaders in styles would build those wonderful head +decorations something like the patterns furnished by +nature they would be more beautiful and becoming."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if it has only one leg?"</p> + +<p>John laughed. "I imagine it has two. It is the +custom of many birds of this species to stand for +hours on one leg. It is of the same family as the +stork, the heron and the ibis."</p> + +<p>"Why don't we see more animals?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150">p. 150</a></span></p> + +<p>"The island is not, probably, large enough. These +small islands have only the smallest kinds. Besides, +the larger animals are found where the nature of the +country permits them to conceal themselves."</p> + +<p>George stopped before a large bush which had rows +of yellow flowers growing up all along the stems, and +at each flower was a seed.</p> + +<p>"Ah! you have found a most valuable plant," said +John, as he broke off one of the stems. "Feel the +crushed leaves."</p> + +<p>"It is just like grease."</p> + +<p>"It is an oil. It is one of the products largely +used in the United States, as a substitute for olive +oil, and for soap making."</p> + +<p>"What is it called?"</p> + +<p>"The plant is known as Benne. The product is +Sesame oil. The peculiarity of the plant is that +nearly one-half of the leaf is a pure oil, and it can +remain exposed a long time before it turns rancid."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if that is what they use in their cooking!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; it is absolutely inodorous, and is better than +lard for table uses. Look at the seeds. They are +classed with the most nutritious in the world."</p> + +<p>"The Chief had them, and I tried some of them +the first night I dined with him."</p> + +<p>The route led to an upper plateau, well wooded, +many of the trees being of the palm variety, with +plenty of silver-leafed families so common everywhere.</p> + +<p>"Do look at the Coffee trees?" exclaimed Harry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151">p. 151</a></span></p> + +<p>The Chief's son was consulted. He had no knowledge +of the use of the berry. "We must take a lot +of the berries back with us. This will be a treat at +the celebration." John stopped short, and the boys +commenced to laugh. He had almost given away the +scheme for the wedding feast. Sutoto did not catch +the force of the allusion.</p> + +<p>George and Harry were now on the quest for new +things in every direction, and the natives aided them +in carrying out their every wish. After they had +reached a small stream flowing to the north it became +evident that they had passed the highest point of the +plateau, and were now descending.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 351px;"> +<a id="illus-fig9" name="illus-fig9" /> +<a href="#p_151"> +<img src="images/illus-fig9-p151.png" width="351" height="261" +alt="Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne." title="Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 9. <span class="u">Sesame</span> <span class="u">Oil</span> <span class="u">Plant</span>. +<span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Benne</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>One of the natives pointed out a peculiarly-shaped +tree, tall, with immense leaves, and at each leaf +cluster there was an immense white flower.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152">p. 152</a></span></p> + +<p>"Here is a tree with yellow flowers. We must +have some of these as specimens," said Harry.</p> + +<p>The trees were exceedingly tall. "The men are +asking if you want some of the flowers," said Sutoto.</p> + +<p>"By all means," answered George. Without a +moment's hesitation a young athlete made his way to +the top, and gathered a dozen branches, which he +dropped to the ground.</p> + +<p>The beauty of these flowers is difficult to describe. +The tree body is perfectly straight, and the limbs +grow out uniformly +on three +sides, the leaves +being very rough.</p> + +<p>"This is a species +which belongs +to the Indicus +family," remarked +John, as +he cut off one of +the leaves. "It +would be a good +tree for carpenters +to raise."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 229px;"> +<a id="illus-fig10" name="illus-fig10" /> +<a href="#p_152"> +<img src="images/illus-fig10-p152.png" width="229" height="291" +alt="Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree." title="Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Flower</span> <span class="u">of</span> +<span class="u">Indica</span> <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Why so?" +asked George.</p> + +<p>"You see it is just like sand-paper."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is something to know. But will it +really smooth down wood?"</p> + +<p>"It is frequently used for that purpose, and you +might take some along and try it."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153">p. 153</a></span></p> + +<p>At intervals John was observed taking up bits of +soil, which he carefully wrapped up and deposited in +one of the receptacles.</p> + +<p>"I am curious to know what you are taking dirt +for?" said Harry.</p> + +<p>"I should have told you that a knowledge of the +nature of the soil is one of the things that is very +important to the agriculturist. Many men have +made failures because they planted things which the +earth was not adapted to grow."</p> + +<p>"It has always been a wonder to me why things +really do grow up out of the dirt," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is not difficult to understand, if you will consider +that the ground contains food, and that a plant +can grow only where it can get the right kind. Then, +there may be plenty of food but not the kind it can +digest."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is news to me. Do plants digest +food?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, just the same as what we call living animals. +The tree is somewhat different from animals, in the +particular that it digests its food first and then consumes +it afterwards. In this particular certain +larvæ act the same as trees, that is digest it before +they consume it."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by larva?"</p> + +<p>"The early form of certain living organisms, before +they are fully developed. Thus, the tadpole is +the larva of the frog. A great many insects are +bred from what are called grubs, or caterpillars. +All these are called larva."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154">p. 154</a></span></p> + +<p>"What kind of food is found in the earth?"</p> + +<p>"Many, many kinds. Carbon, nitrogen, the various +salts, such as lime, magnesia, strontia, and the +like, and when the little feelers shoot out from the +roots, they are in search of something to eat."</p> + +<p>At this point they were interrupted by shouting +and laughter from one section of the searching party, +and the boys ran out across the open to learn its +cause. Two of the natives were carrying a dark +brown object, about half the size of an ordinary hog.</p> + +<p>It was kicking vigorously, but did not appear to be +at all vicious.</p> + +<p>"Why, it looks just like a little bear," said George +as he danced about. "Let us keep it for a pet."</p> + +<p>"It is a bear," said John. "It is the Bruang, or +the sun-bear of the Malayan peninsula."</p> + +<p>"But doesn't it grow any bigger?"</p> + +<p>"No; that is a full size specimen; in fact, it is a +pretty large specimen, I should judge."</p> + +<p>"What beautiful fur, and so soft! Will it bite?"</p> + +<p>"I am of the opinion they can bite, but they are +easily tamed and make great pets. Hasn't it a fine +white spot on its breast?"</p> + +<p>The men stood about and allowed it to move about +within the circle. It cast its eyes around, as much as +to say: "Well, what are you going to do about it?"</p> + +<p>George cried out: "Hold it for a minute," and +he pounced on one of the provision bags, and +brought out a pot of honey. He forced his way in +among the watchers, and with a stick dipped into the +honey held it up before the animal.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155">p. 155</a></span></p> + +<p>It smelled the honey, and began to lick the stick, +and then it darted for the pot. "What a tongue," +exclaimed Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is what they are noted for. The tongue is +made for the very purpose of going into deep holes, +and the greatest use is to rob the hives of the wild +honey bee."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 354px;"> +<a id="illus-fig11" name="illus-fig11" /> +<a href="#p_155"> +<img src="images/illus-fig11-p155.png" width="354" height="276" +alt="Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear." title="Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Bruang.</span> <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Malayan</span> +<span class="u">Bear</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The antics of George and the bear were most amusing +to the watchers, and occasioned roars of laughter. +When the pot was emptied he wanted more, and +nosed around George until the latter could hardly +keep his feet.</p> + +<p>"He is getting to be a mighty close friend," said +John, when he could find time to stop laughing for +a moment.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156">p. 156</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, don't let him get away," cried George, as +he saw the cordon around the animal broken up, leaving +plenty of opening for it to get away.</p> + +<p>But, of course, the natives didn't understand him, +and soon Mr. Bear had all the opportunity in the +world to go home. But he didn't. He walked alongside +of George, and the latter liked to stroke his soft +fur, to which no objection was offered.</p> + +<p>The bear followed and was by his side every +minute of the time for the next hour, and while they +sat down to lunch little Sunny, as George named him, +was at the feast. He had samples of everything in +sight, and the menu tasted good, from honey at the +beginning of the repast, to honey at the end of it.</p> + +<hr class="sorta" /> + +<p>The progress was necessarily slow, because there +were so many things to examine and to make notes +of. They went out of the way from the direct route, +so as to cover as wide an area as possible. Before +camping for the night they had ascended a slight elevation, +and there, to the right and to the left they saw +the wide stretches of the great ocean.</p> + +<p>Directly ahead was a narrow tongue of land, leading +to a broadening area, and off in the dim distance +was a high point. The Chief's son pointed there and +said:</p> + +<p>"On the other side of that high place is where the +bad people live."</p> + +<p>"That must be a long way off," said John. When +this was interpreted he answered: "Another day's +march."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157">p. 157</a></span></p> + +<p>The gentle breeze from the eastern shore was a +great relief.</p> + +<p>They had marched during the day mostly through +forests, and everywhere the atmosphere was close +and still, so that the open space was appreciated.</p> + +<p>All slept soundly that night, and morning came +only too soon for the wearied boys, but they enjoyed +the trip too much to delay moving at the earliest opportunity. +While breakfast was being prepared the +boys sauntered over to the sloping shore to the west, +which was not more than a half mile away.</p> + +<p>They enjoyed walking along the pure white sand, +and after disrobing had a jolly time in the mildly +moving surf. It was not often that they had opportunities +to take a sea bath.</p> + +<p>The bathing place was a deeply-indented bay, with +a long sloping beach,—an ideal spot, with the camp +plainly visible to the east. "Why not take a stroll to +the southern end of the bay?" remarked Harry, after +they were ready to return. "We might be able to +see the headland to the south where we first sighted +land."</p> + +<p>"Well, then, here goes it," and George started +on a strong sprint to the south.</p> + +<p>Harry was by far the fleeter, and reached the +tufted grass ahead of George, and then turned to the +right, to gain the elevation. It was while thus moving +through the brush and débris, which was far +above the normal level of the sea, that they were +attracted by an unusual deposit of brush, and other +accumulations.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158">p. 158</a></span></p> + +<p>"Stop, Harry; here is something we ought to investigate."</p> + +<p>Harry turned and came back. In the early days +of their investigation such a mass would have meant +diligent search. It was more from a recurrence of +the old habit that dictated the idea to George.</p> + +<p>It was well they did so, for not far from the top, +and covered over with seaweed and leaves, was a boxlike +structure, evidently some part of a wreckage. +They worked feverishly at the surrounding mass, +and uncovered it.</p> + +<p>Harry started back. "Do you know what this +is?" he asked. George stooped over, and stared.</p> + +<p>"It is part of the boat which was taken from +South River."</p> + +<p>When that boat disappeared, only to be found +miles away from its original location, the two boxlike +compartments which they had made in it, and the +oars used by them, had been taken away, and instead +they found entirely different oars, and a rope, of +which they knew nothing.</p> + +<p>Here was one of the boxes. "Let's open it," said +George in the most intense tone. That was easily +done, and there they found, to their surprise, one of +their original shell hatchets, part of a coarsely-woven +cloth, which they recognized as one of their early +productions on the first loom, and a dozen or more +gourds, in which food had been placed, and all exactly +as it had been stored away by them. The food +had disappeared, of course, but it had been lost by +the action of the sea, and decomposition, as it was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159">p. 159</a></span> +evident that the contents had not been disturbed by +any one.</p> + +<p>"Let us call John," said Harry, and he bounded +up the beach, and ran over the crest, waving his arms +as he did so. He had not gone half the distance +before those at the camp saw Harry running, and +John, and most of those in sight started on a run, +George meanwhile industriously dragging away the +débris.</p> + +<p>"We have found it," cried Harry, as John came +within hailing distance, and without waiting for them +to come up he bolted back.</p> + +<p>"Now what have you discovered?" asked John as +he came up breathless.</p> + +<p>"Part of our old boat."</p> + +<p>"We thought George had met with some accident."</p> + +<p>"We got this by accident," answered George. +"See, here are some more things. This is the oar we +had. How can you explain that?"</p> + +<p>It was certainly a poser. Why the exchange of +oars? John shook his head. For once he had no +theory even to offer. "Come, boys, let us take away +all this stuff."</p> + +<p>All gave a hand, Sutoto wondering why there +should be so much ado about a bit of wreckage. +George explained the affair, as well as he could.</p> + +<p>"What is that board?" exclaimed John. "No, not +a board; that is part of a boat," he added as more of +the accumulation was torn away.</p> + +<p>"It's a boat; it's a boat!" almost shrieked George.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160">p. 160</a></span></p> + +<p>"Come to this end and take away this lot of seaweed," +called out Harry.</p> + +<p>They soon uncovered a boat with one end embedded +in the sand so it was difficult to turn it over, +owing to the rotten condition of the wood. Only +here and there was any paint visible. The action of +the elements had done its work.</p> + +<p>"What kind of a boat was this?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>John did not answer, but peered down on the sand +where the prow had rested. "Take away the sand +carefully here," he said, and when he pointed the +boys saw something white protruding an inch or two.</p> + +<p>As the sand was scraped away they first saw the +thigh bone of a skeleton, and soon the whole frame +was laid bare, the interstices filled with sand. A +peculiar rope was around the frame, and John +grasped it.</p> + +<p>The boys eagerly looked at it as John intently examined +it. "It is the same," he said.</p> + +<p>"The same as what?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"The same as the rope found on the boat when you +discovered it on the beach."</p> + +<p>That was the first time that the boys knew that +John had any idea about the loss of the boat, or of +the strange rope. It was possible, however, that the +Professor had told John about it, as they were accustomed +to talk over these strange things.</p> + +<p>"But the boat?" asked George. "What do you +think of the boat?"</p> + +<p>"It is the exact counterpart of the <i>Investigator's</i> +Life boat No. 3."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161">p. 161</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> Chief's son was present. "Did you ever +know of a boat load of castaways on the island?" +asked John.</p> + +<p>"We never knew of anything like that," was his +reply.</p> + +<p>Every scrap in that mass of wreckage was gone +over. There was nothing else visible by which they +could gain the slightest clue. The skeleton was +minutely examined. It was that of a strong, well-developed +man, but from all appearances one leg was +shorter than the other.</p> + +<p>The bones of the shortened leg were closely investigated. +"The bones show that this man met with +an accident in early life, or before he was fully +grown, or, he may have had some disease before he +attained full growth, so that his right leg is shorter +because not fully developed," said John, as he continued +the examination.</p> + +<p>"He must have been a soldier or an adventurer, +as he has three bullet marks, one here in the right +shoulder, one in the ankle, and the other on the cheek +bone. All of the wounds were healed before he met +his death."</p> + +<p>"But there is one thing which is still more remark<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162">p. 162</a></span>able. +This man was a captive. He was tied in the +boat and it was set adrift, and was likely on the open +sea and washed ashore during one of the monsoons."</p> + +<p>"Why do you think so?" asked Harry, as soon as +he could recover breath after this announcement.</p> + +<p>"This rope tells the story."</p> + +<p>"But how does it happen that he and the boat +were together. It seems to me that if the waves were +high enough to bring the boat clear up to this point, +he would be freed from the boat long before it +reached this place."</p> + +<p>"He was tied to the boat."</p> + +<p>One mystery was solved, and another more terrible +in its aspect came upon its heels. There was but one +thing to do, and that was to bury the skeleton, and +John ordered this done, as soon as he had taken the +complete measurements of the remains.</p> + +<p>"We don't want the box or the things in it now," +said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Indeed, I want the hatchet," answered George.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and the rope," added John.</p> + +<p>The boys went back to the camp with thoughtful +expressions on their faces.</p> + +<p>"This seems to be a Wonder Island, too," said +George, more to himself than to any one else.</p> + +<p>They descended the incline, and crossed the narrow +neck of land that joined the two parts of the island. +Beyond, as they advanced the ground grew more +uneven and rugged. Occasionally rocks appeared, +the first that they had noticed except around the place +where George was captured.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163">p. 163</a></span></p> + +<p>Nevertheless, vegetation grew in even greater profusion +than on the other branch of the island. There +were more berries upon which all the natives feasted, +and the boys were not slow to pick them as they +passed.</p> + +<p>In traveling alongside of a hill Harry was the first +to call attention to a peculiar leaf on a plant, which +bore rose-shaped flowers. "This is something new +to me. There is nothing like it on Wonder Island. +Did you notice it, +John?"</p> + +<p>The latter took a +branch, and gazed at +it for a long time. "I +am surprised to find +this growing here. It +is a plant well known +in Palestine, and is +called the Rose of +Jericho."</p> + +<p>"What a delightful +perfume it has," said +Harry.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 229px;"> +<a id="illus-fig12" name="illus-fig12" /> +<a href="#p_163"> +<img src="images/illus-fig12-p163.png" width="229" height="263" +alt="Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho." title="Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Rose</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Jericho</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"It is not noted on +that account, however. It is the <i>resurrection</i> plant."</p> + +<p>"How singular; and in what way did it get that +name?"</p> + +<p>"It may be dried up entirely, and if placed in +water it will again appear to revive and raise itself +up. This is, of course, due to its power to absorb a +vast amount of water. It is found near the shores of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164">p. 164</a></span> +the Dead Sea, and I recall that when I was in Jerusalem +it was a common thing to see the plant in its +dried-up state, sold to pilgrims who were instructed +how to resurrect it."</p> + +<p>Here was caught the second and only other animal +on the trip. It was somewhat smaller than Sunny, +and the latter danced about the dead animal, as the +"boys" brought it in.</p> + +<p>"And what is this big-eared fellow?" asked +George.</p> + +<p>John laughed as he recognized the apt description. +"It is a kind of Australian kangaroo. It inhabits +trees, but is very +clumsy in appearance +and in action. +It is a kind of sloth, +or wombat."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 235px;"> +<a id="illus-fig13" name="illus-fig13" /> +<a href="#p_164"> +<img src="images/illus-fig13-p164.png" width="235" height="213" +alt="Fig. 13. The Koala." title="Fig. 13. The Koala." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Koala</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Isn't that a +dandy fur?"</p> + +<p>"The fur is not +so valuable as its +skin. There is +nothing to compare +with the softness +of the hide when tanned. It feels like the finest +velvet, and is very strong and durable."</p> + +<p>They were now ascending a series of hills, each +more difficult than the last, and the ground became +extremely rough and broken. There was a lone +path, in many places nearly obliterated. It was the +uninviting road to the land of sorrow.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165">p. 165</a></span></p> + +<p>The Chief's son tried to be in the company of the +boys at all times, and while he could not understand +their chatter, Sutoto was a willing interpreter. He +enjoyed the jolly freedom of the two chums, and +their uniform good nature.</p> + +<p>George and Harry were ever on the alert to make +him feel at ease and so they talked with him, and told +of the things which John explained, and it was +plainly seen that he marveled at things which were +described.</p> + +<p>Referring to the exiled people, George asked: +"Do those people never return after they are once +condemned?"</p> + +<p>"They are never permitted to come back."</p> + +<p>"Do they stay there of their own free will?"</p> + +<p>"No; I am told that they long to be at home +again."</p> + +<p>"Well, what would you do if they tried to come +back?"</p> + +<p>"We would drive them away. One time they tried +to come back, all of them, and we had to kill some +of them," and he said it in a tone of regret.</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe in killing?"</p> + +<p>He looked at George for a moment, and then looked +up into Sutoto's eyes, as he said: "No; it would do +no good. Would that be the right way?" he asked +with a sort of innocence that brought a blush to +George's cheeks.</p> + +<p>"No; we do not believe in killing, except when we +must to protect ourselves."</p> + +<p>"But do you have to make such wonderful things<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166">p. 166</a></span> +as those (pointing to the guns) to protect yourselves?"</p> + +<p>John threw back his head and tried to prevent a +loud laugh, at this perfectly obvious question, while +he looked at the boys to see what sort of an answer +would be given.</p> + +<p>George was non-plussed for a minute. John had +no business to disconcert him in that way. He +turned and expected Harry to answer, but it seemed +as though he had imperfectly understood it. There +was no way out of it, and George tried to get his body +into a proper position to answer it with dignity.</p> + +<p>"Well, you see, the guns were not made for the +purpose of killing people, but for sporting purposes."</p> + +<p>"Do you have many wild animals in your country?" +he asked naïvely.</p> + +<p>"Not many now."</p> + +<p>John laughed a little so as not to be too undignified, +and George saw the humor of the situation. He +did not want to pursue the subject any further, and +John graciously turned the conversation by announcing +the discovery of the Upas tree.</p> + +<p>"I didn't know the Upas tree was of such immense +size," said Harry. "Is it really true that it kills +everything that comes near it?"</p> + +<p>"No, that is greatly exaggerated. The only time +when it gives forth any harmful exudations, is when +it is cut down, or when the bark is torn away, or it is +wounded in such a way that the sap comes into contact +with the body."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167">p. 167</a></span></p> + +<p>The illustration shows a flowering branch of the +tree, and gives an idea of the silk-like leaves.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;"> +<a id="illus-fig14" name="illus-fig14" /> +<a href="#p_167"> +<img src="images/illus-fig14-p167.png" width="380" height="267" +alt="Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree." title="Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 14. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Flower</span> <span class="u">of</span> +<span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Upas</span> <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>They were still going upwardly. On both sides, to +the east and to the west could be seen the rolling sea. +Ahead was the mountain, if such it might be called. +Rocks began to appear everywhere. John stopped +long at some of those dark gray walls, and chipped +off many specimens.</p> + +<p>There were now fewer birds and animals, except +very small species, such as squirrels, and a variety +of weasel, quick in its movements and reddish in +color.</p> + +<p>"This begins to look promising," remarked John, +as he crawled around the ledges.</p> + +<p>"Do you think we shall find any caves here?" +asked George.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168">p. 168</a></span></p> + +<p>"I shall be very much surprised if we do not," he +answered.</p> + +<p>"Isn't it singular that the natives never knew +about them, if there are any here?"</p> + +<p>"No; I do not think that is strange; they do not +believe in the witch doctors, and they have no Krishnos +here, so that the caves are of no value to them."</p> + +<p>"But do you find much that is valuable in the way +of ores?"</p> + +<p>"The hills here are full of the most valuable minerals. +The little prospecting I have done is sufficient +to satisfy me on that point. I am trying to make a +fair estimate so I can give an accurate report when +we return."</p> + +<p>It was late in the afternoon when they reached the +summit of the mountain which they had viewed from +the south. It was green to the very summit, and +from the elevation where they stood they could see +a long and narrow stretch to the north, the distance +in that direction being much farther than they had +traveled from the little bight of land on the south.</p> + +<p>"It does look inviting in that part of the island," +said Harry. "Were you ever there, in the bad +place?" asked Harry as the Chief's son came up.</p> + +<p>"No; but I have heard much about it."</p> + +<p>One of the natives who heard the conversation +said: "It is a beautiful place."</p> + +<p>"Have you ever been there?" he was asked.</p> + +<p>"I was a guard on two occasions when we took +prisoners there," he answered.</p> + +<p>"Tell us about it," said George.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169">p. 169</a></span></p> + +<p>"I have never been in the village, but within an +hour's march of it. The Chief warned us never to +go into the place itself."</p> + +<p>Aside from the village the place which interested +John and the boys most was the mountain on which +they were now standing. This must be explored. It +was now late in the afternoon, and at John's suggestion +they encamped, and only short excursions were +made by the boys in the quest for something new.</p> + +<p>It was a delightful night. The elevation gave +them the advantage of a beautiful breeze, and the +odors wafted to them, from some unknown source, +on the mild trade wind from the north, was almost +like a narcotic, so soothing and restful.</p> + +<p>"Did you ever visit a more delightful spot?" +asked Harry, as he inhaled the beautiful perfume.</p> + +<p>"It does not seem to me that the criminal colony +is in a very bad place, if this is any indication of it. +Isn't that way of dealing with crime a strange +thing?" remarked George.</p> + +<p>"Why so?" asked John. "Is it anything peculiar +for the wrongdoers to be banished from a community?"</p> + +<p>"No; but it seems wrong to condemn the innocent +women and children. Why should they be punished +along with the guilty?"</p> + +<p>"Probably, in the majority of cases, the women +and children would prefer to accompany their husband +and father. That does not seem to be so cruel, +when it is considered that they are left free to live +as much so as in their own community."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170">p. 170</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is what I cannot understand. What is the +use of sending them away, if they are not locked +up?"</p> + +<p>"Do you not know that among the ancients, banishment +from a country was the greatest punishment; +greater even than death, in the opinion of many; and +there are many cases where suicide was preferable. +The odium of banishment was so great in those days +that only the strongest and the greatest of men could +live it down."</p> + +<p>"It makes me feel, when I smell this delightful perfume, +that the home of the bad people over there +must be a beautiful place," said George.</p> + +<p>"To give such an opinion, just because of the +fragrance that comes from the north is proper for a +sentimentalist," said John, as he laughed.</p> + +<p>"Well, that is a pretty big name to give, and I +suppose it means having some notion that hasn't any +sense in it, but just theory?"</p> + +<p>"That is a fairly close description, but I didn't +mean it in that way."</p> + +<p>The boys never felt resentful at anything that John +might say, as they knew and appreciated his noble +character and disposition too well not to understand +that his remarks were never born of malice.</p> + +<p>After a restful night preparations were made for +a complete survey of the mountain, if it might be so +dignified. Its greatest altitude did not exceed eight +or nine hundred feet, and the width of the island at +this point did not exceed two miles. It was quite +rugged toward the east, but on the western side of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171">p. 171</a></span> +the island the descent was sloping, and offered easy +examination.</p> + +<p>The natives were instructed what to do, and were +told that they should particularly hunt for caves, or +great holes, or entrances into the hills. Four search +parties were thus organized, John being at the head +of one, and George, Harry and Sutoto, each being a +leader in the others.</p> + +<p>Sutoto was most competent for work of this kind, +as he had accompanied the boys on many expeditions, +and was anxious to be of service in the +quest.</p> + +<p>John took a direction to the northeast, and Sutoto +to the southeast, thus leaving Harry and George with +their parties to explore the region to the west, and +northwest.</p> + +<p>As they were separating George slyly remarked: +"John must have had some particular reason for +taking the direction he did."</p> + +<p>Harry smiled. "I hope we shall find the first +caves."</p> + +<p>Before separating John told them that he was +desirous of finding a cavern which had certain peculiar +markings therein, and the description showed +it to be Cross-shaped. This must not be forgotten.</p> + +<p>They entered into the undertaking with the greatest +enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>The boys simply danced, as they went down the +hill, so great was the joy and the freedom of that +beautiful spot. What a wonderful sensation is produced +by beautiful odors. It is like a thought which<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172">p. 172</a></span> +transports you. On the other hand, when the odors +are disagreeable how it depresses and disgusts.</p> + +<p>A great French physician has said that in his +observations, the real happy people are those who +delight in beautiful odors; and while it is not true +that criminals are devoid of the elevating influence of +delightful perfumes, still, they are less influenced +thereby.</p> + +<p>In a number of tests made some years ago, a curious +fact was observed: Sweet odors were allowed to +Teach sleeping patients, which, when they did excite +dreams, made them feel that they were living in a +world of bliss, and surrounded by all the luxuries of +life. On the other hand, when exposed to evil smelling +odors, they dreamed of miseries, and of trouble +and disgrace.</p> + +<p>It was understood that the different expeditions +were to report at the camp at midday, and that in +the event of any accident, or other mishap, the firing +of the guns would be sufficient warning to the party +at the camp and to those who were searching.</p> + +<p>George had with him two of his own "boys," and +two of the natives, and Harry was also accompanied +by several of his particular favorites. Harry, with +his party, was the energetic one, as he was exceedingly +wiry and a good walker. He did not intend to +permit the others to encroach on any of his territory.</p> + +<p>Not a vestige of anything was found which even +so much as pointed to a cave or to the sign of human +occupancy in that section. George, on the other +hand, was more fortunate. In his area the shelving<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173">p. 173</a></span> +rocks were more numerous, and he also knew that +the rocks were limestone, and that caves were more +likely to exist in limestone formation than in trap +rock, or either in granite or sandstone formations.</p> + +<p>He was, therefore, fully prepared, when, in the +early part of his investigation, to find, what appeared +to be entrances, but in all cases they were blind leads,—that +is they led in for short distances only, many of +them being mere cleavages of the rocks.</p> + +<p>The real cave is the one where the limestone is +eaten out by the erosive action of the water attacking +the calcium of the rock. Furthermore, he felt that +he must go down nearer sea level to be assured of +success, and he acted on that impulse.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174">p. 174</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> would be useless to recount the experiences of +all of the parties. They had four hours of search +before them. This would, at least, give some idea +as to the nature of the mountain, and enable John to +decide whether it would be wise to give that project +further consideration.</p> + +<p>At midday the parties began to appear, first +Harry, then Sutoto, followed by John, and finally +George. The latter was the only one who was smiling. +The three early parties had no news to impart.</p> + +<p>"What have you found?" were the hailing words +of George, as he approached.</p> + +<p>"Nothing! nothing!" were the answers.</p> + +<p>"It takes me to bring home the goods," he remarked, +and Harry laughed in derision.</p> + +<p>"No; but I mean it," he continued. "I have captured +a modern, good-sized cave, and it is now awaiting +to be explored."</p> + +<p>John could not believe the tale. "You are to be +congratulated. Good boy!" Needless to add, +George was the happiest person in that camp.</p> + +<p>"Let us go down to see it at once," said George in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175">p. 175</a></span> +his eagerness. "It is quite a distance, as it is not +more than five hundred feet from the seashore."</p> + +<p>"Luncheon first," remarked John, and no one interposed +an objection, as the trip had sharpened the +appetites of all.</p> + +<p>The meal over little time was lost in making a +start, and George led the way with his boys. Truly +enough, there was the open mouth, and it was cave-like. +Now for the mysteries within. "We went in +only about a hundred feet, so as to be sure we weren't +fooled," said George, in reference to his discovery.</p> + +<p>The lamps were then prepared, and all the preparations +made, the boys being veterans in this sort of +work, and John was ahead, as was generally the custom +in these expeditions.</p> + +<p>"This is as far as we went," said George. Beyond +was still a wall which glistened from the +streaming lights.</p> + +<p>Gradually the walls came closer together; the +track was a narrow one; so they had to march in +single file. John called a halt. "I am afraid this is +a blind hole," he said, but George could not believe +it, so the side walls were searched, for indications of +some opening.</p> + +<p>"This is the end of the cave. Note the side walls. +If they should be pressed against each other they +would fit exactly, showing that it is an opening +caused by a fissure and not by erosion."</p> + +<p>Harry could not help but laugh. All this time lost +on a blind lead, and the laugh was on George.</p> + +<p>Harry could not help jesting him. "If you are a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176">p. 176</a></span> +good tribe finder it is no sign that caves are in your +line."</p> + +<p>John enjoyed the laugh on George, but the latter +retorted: "I think the joke is on you, for traveling +all this distance to see a hole in the ground."</p> + +<p>There was not the sign of a cave on the island, +aside from the one discovered (?) by George, so the +party remained that night at the mountain top, and +in the morning descended the hill, and slowly +marched to the north. Before noon they entered a +beautiful stretch of woodland, with luxurious grass +growing all around in profusion.</p> + +<p>"This is as far as the guards have been permitted +to go," said one of the natives, who had volunteered +the information about the place the day before.</p> + +<p>Thus far not a human being was visible. An +hour's march would bring them to the village of the +criminals, and the boys began to examine their +weapons, and to look apprehensive.</p> + +<p>The wild fruits of the tropics were now seen in +abundance in every direction. Bananas, the Bread +Fruit, Cocoa, and Date Palm, on every hand.</p> + +<p>The most astonishing thing, however, was the profusion +of flowers, of every variety, seemingly, and +the air was scented as with one vast bouquet.</p> + +<p>Sutoto stopped and pointed ahead: "They are in +the trees gathering fruit." The party halted, and +looked, and then proceeded.</p> + +<p>They were, undoubtedly, the first of the criminals. +A half mile beyond, and in a plain road, were several +of the inhabitants. Those in the trees, two men and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177">p. 177</a></span> +a boy, descended, and, together with two women, +walked across the field, to witness the newly-arrived +criminals, as they supposed.</p> + +<p>They were astounded at the appearance of the +party. The Chief's son addressed the men, and told +them who they were, and their mission. As this was +the first time that such a visit had ever been made, +the man instructed the boy to run to the village and +inform the people, and he scurried away.</p> + +<p>Meantime the party moved on, and, as they proceeded, +more and more of the inhabitants were seen. +To the right were people in the fields, engaged in +some sort of work there. This was singular. Nothing +of that kind was seen in the village where Beralsee +was chief.</p> + +<p>"What is the name of this town where the convicts +live?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Hutoton," replied Calmo.</p> + +<p>"And what is the name of your town?"</p> + +<p>"Sasite."</p> + +<p>"Rather queer names, I should say," exclaimed +Harry.</p> + +<p>John laughed and glanced at Harry, as he said: +"I wonder how <i>Unity</i>, and <i>Pioneer</i>, and <i>Mayfield</i>, +and the queer English names sound to them!"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I suppose they have some good reason for +having such names."</p> + +<p>"Yes; for the same reason that we apply names to +certain things. See what a wonderful expression +there is in the word 'Harsh,' and how expressive it +is compared with its opposite 'soft.' How the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178">p. 178</a></span> +word grates, and the second comes out so smoothly. +Then, compare 'swift' and 'slow'; or 'sweet' and +'sour.' Ugh! I can almost taste the last word."</p> + +<p>John roared, as he saw the serious aspect of +Harry's face. But other sights now attracted their +attention. A group of men and women appeared. +How strange the natives looked. They were well +dressed, that is, judged from the people in Sasite, +and they were people of good deportment, if those of +the inhabitants that accompanied them were fair +specimens.</p> + +<p>At the head of the villagers was a man of striking +appearance, tall, with white hair, such as you would +call distinguished, because he differed from most +around him. The women were well clad, and the +children plump and vigorous in their actions.</p> + +<p>Something must be wrong! These people were +not criminals! The old man came forward, and +gave a respectful bow. He looked at John and said +a few words. Calmo responded, his words when +translated being: "These are friends of my father, +and they have come to visit you."</p> + +<p>At this the man gave another bow, and John went +up and held out his hand, which the man took in a +simple and unaffected manner.</p> + +<p>"We welcome you to our village," was his reply.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other and relaxed their +hold on the guns. Was this, after all, the wicked +place that had been described to them? As they +marched down to the village they were enchanted at +the flowers which greeted them on all sides.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179">p. 179</a></span></p> + +<p>Here and there were garden spots, carefully kept, +and when the first huts appeared beyond the grove, +the boys simply gasped, and could hardly believe +their senses. Hundreds of Magnolia trees were in +bloom; and the gentle breeze blowing in from the sea, +moderated the rays of the sun, and wafted the odor +of the plants many miles inland.</p> + +<p>The homes were not rudely built, and, although +they were on the same general plan of those in Sasite, +they had every appearance of comfort.</p> + +<p>The head man of the village led them to a more +pretentious home, probably his own dwelling. This +was soon confirmed, as they were invited to enter and +repose themselves on slightly elevated couches, so +much like Chief Beralsee's court.</p> + +<p>Within a short time there was a great commotion +in the village. The boys looked around startled, and +the old man noticed it, for he turned to Calmo, and +said: "The villagers are preparing a feast for you. +Let them go out and mingle with the people."</p> + +<p>The boys were happy at this opportunity of satisfying +their curiosity. Sutoto accompanied them, +and with Calmo, they placed themselves under the +guidance of a young man named Anasa, who, Calmo +said, was the son of the old man.</p> + +<p>They passed down the main street, for there was +some semblance of order in the location of the huts. +Around the huts were flowers, just as they had seen +on the path leading from the mountain, and here +and there patches of growing vegetables. After +passing one rather attractive looking hut, Anasa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180">p. 180</a></span> +paused for a moment, and then turned back, motioning +for them to follow. He entered, and the boys +saw a villager, and two women within.</p> + +<p>Anasa pointed to the figure of a man seated in a +chair, and upon seeing it both boys started back in +amazement.</p> + +<p>"That is a white man," cried Harry.</p> + +<p>Anasa nodded, his manner indicating that he felt +sure that the boys would recognize him as belonging +to their race. George went up to him, and held out +his hand. In response the man gave a listless look, +and slowly raised the left hand, which was grasped +by George, who said: "I am glad to see you. Who +are you? We are white, the same as you are."</p> + +<p>The man made no sign, and his arm dropped to +his side as George relaxed his grasp. Harry touched +George on the shoulder, as he said: "There is something +the matter with him. Ask Anasa about him."</p> + +<p>Calmo put the question, and this was the reply: +"We found the poor fellow on the beach many moons +ago. We brought him here, and tried to heal him, +but he does not speak, and one side of him has no +life."</p> + +<p>The man made no show of recognition, and the +only motion observable was a twitching jerk of the +left arm, and a slightly swaying motion of the head.</p> + +<p>"John must know about this," said George.</p> + +<p>"By all means," was the reply.</p> + +<p>Calmo was told about the wonderful man John, +and that he should be called at once, so one of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181">p. 181</a></span> +accompanying natives was instructed to bring John, +and he speeded away on the errand.</p> + +<p>George stood outside of the hut when John came +up. "This is a remarkable thing. Did they tell you +about it?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"There is a white man here."</p> + +<p>"Where?" asked John in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"In the hut, and he is paralyzed and cannot +speak."</p> + +<p>John did not wait for more, and as he went the +head man followed him in. Then they told him the +story, and John stood there and gazed at the man. +To the boys who were by John's side he remarked: +"I do not know him. I do not think I ever saw him +before. How long has he been in this condition?" +The old man responded: "Ever since we picked +him up on the shore, about <i>tuta romama</i> ago."</p> + +<p>"And how long ago was that?"</p> + +<p>George informed him that Calmo received the information +that it was over two years prior to that +time, and as John received this information he +passed his hand over his head, and, turning to Harry, +said: "We shall, probably, get at the bottom of +another mystery."</p> + +<p>"What is it? Why do you think so?" asked +George in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"Not now; not now!" answered John, wishing to +defer discussion until they were out of the stricken +man's hearing.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182">p. 182</a></span></p> + +<p>The latter, however, did not in the least appreciate +who were before him. He was not at all perturbed +by his visitors, nor when John quietly passed his +hand along the poor man's arm and body to satisfy +himself of the extent of the paralytic stroke.</p> + +<p>He winced but slightly when the examination of +the left side was made, otherwise there was no sign +of comprehension on his part.</p> + +<p>"This is a remarkable thing," said John, as they +were returning to the old man's dwelling.</p> + +<p>"Why, is it a peculiar case?"</p> + +<p>"The ailment itself is not remarkable; but there +is something which passes my comprehension."</p> + +<p>"What is it!" asked the boys in, unison.</p> + +<p>"These people are savages."</p> + +<p>"Yes; answered the boys."</p> + +<p>"And they are criminals," he said as he stopped +and looked at the boys, with an earnestness that surprised +them.</p> + +<p>It did not take more words to make them understand +what John meant. These people had taken +this shipwrecked man, and tenderly cared for him +during a period of more than two years. This was +done without hope of reward. John learned later +on that the natives of the town had made provision +for the shipwrecked man and had compensated the +people at whose home he was then living.</p> + +<p>After the evening meal, John walked around the +village, observing the people, and he found happiness +everywhere. Everything seemed to be arranged +according to a system. The old man was not a chief,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183">p. 183</a></span> +but was looked upon as their advisor and guide; but +he was a criminal, as were all the others in that town.</p> + +<p>That evening when all were present John had the +first opportunity to talk with the venerable chief of +the town.</p> + +<p>"How long have you been here?" he was asked.</p> + +<p>He was silent for a moment and then answered: +"Thirty years."</p> + +<p>It must be understood that the questions and +answers had to be translated and as the natives knew +nothing about the division of time in months or years +it was necessary to convert the time which was given +by nature into terms of years and months.</p> + +<p>Thus, they understood what a day meant, and they +could calculate time, as all savages do, by the phases +of the moon, and in many cases they were able to +indicate time by the position of the sun, in which +they recognized three phases only, namely, when the +sun was directly above them, and when it reached the +extreme northern and southern points.</p> + +<p>"Why were you sent here?"</p> + +<p>"Because I committed a crime."</p> + +<p>John was almost startled at the frankness of the +confession, which the old man made without the least +perceptible show of feeling or shame.</p> + +<p>"Would you like to go back again?"</p> + +<p>"Go back where?"</p> + +<p>"To your home."</p> + +<p>He looked bewildered for a moment, and then +answered: "This is my home."</p> + +<p>"But I mean your old home at Sasite."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184">p. 184</a></span></p> + +<p>The old man shook his head vigorously, and answered: +"No! no! There is no place like Hutoton."</p> + +<p>"Do you know what 'Hutoton' means?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; it means 'the place of death.'"</p> + +<p>The boys were startled at the reply. John turned +to them, when he saw their expression, and smiled. +The old man, too, smiled.</p> + +<p>"Do any of your people want to go back?"</p> + +<p>He looked surprised at the question. "Do they +want to go back?" he repeated the query. "No; +but you should ask them. I do not know of any one +who wishes to return. We love our Chief too much +to wish for such a thing."</p> + +<p>"Do you know what the people in Sasite think of +this place?"</p> + +<p>"No; not altogether; I am curious to know."</p> + +<p>"They believe it is a terrible place, and that the +people who are sent here never have another day +of peace or happiness."</p> + +<p>"And have they not changed their opinions? I +used to think so too, and we believed it of those who +went before us; but we thought they might have +changed their opinions, because we felt that people +were growing better and not worse. It is a long time +since they sent us real criminals, and we thought +the Chief's people were growing wiser and happier."</p> + +<p>"When did the last criminals come here?"</p> + +<p>"Nearly one year ago."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185">p. 185</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was impossible to describe the effect of these +revelations on the boys. It was so different from +anything they had been led to expect. It brought +one thing forcibly to their minds; that because these +people had committed some crime, or some wrong +against society, they were still human beings, and +were worthy of being treated as men and women.</p> + +<p>John related to them that various governments +had tried the plan of sending convicts to some foreign +lands, and placing them in situations where they +might work out their own salvation; that all such efforts +were successful, where real opportunities were +bestowed.</p> + +<p>"The idea is," remarked John, "that they are +banished from the society in which they resided, or +in which they were raised, for the purpose of helping +them. The reason for inflicting punishment on +criminals has been to protect society but apparently +no efforts have been made to cure the criminals or +to help them to better themselves."</p> + +<p>"I heard the Professor say, at one of the trials at +Wonder Island, that some scientists consider crime a +disease," said George.</p> + +<p>"Exactly; now suppose we treated people suffering +from smallpox, or scarlet fever, or some other<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186">p. 186</a></span> +like disease, just like we treat criminals, it would +be regarded as brutal. To lock them up, and deprive +them of the pleasures of living, simply to protect +society, is wrong."</p> + +<p>"But the smallpox and scarlet fever patients are +taken away so they will not give the complaints to +others," observed Harry.</p> + +<p>"And that is right. I favor that and advocate +that same thing with criminals. But the patients are +not deprived of the things they have been accustomed +to, and they are restored, when cured. It is not so +with the poor unfortunate who errs. When he does +come back he is hounded and looked upon as a +tainted individual, although he may, in heart, be better +than his accusers."</p> + +<p>During that day and the next, the natives and those +who accompanied John associated with each other, +and had many conversations. What interested them +was the presence of the unfortunate paralytic who +was unable to speak for himself.</p> + +<p>The boys did not believe that he was one of the +crew of the school ship <i>Investigator</i>. What connection, +if any, did he have with the skeleton they found +the day before? was another of their queries.</p> + +<p>On the second day they were taken to the beach +where the white man was found. There, as explained, +he was found, with wreckage all about, during +one of the raging monsoons with which the boys +were so well acquainted, but aside from that there +was not a vestige to show his name or where he +was from.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187">p. 187</a></span></p> + +<p>All the clothing worn by him originally, and of +that there was scarcely any when found, had been +worn threadbare, and he was now dressed in native +garments. The chair in which he was reclining was +undoubtedly from some wrecked ship, and had been +in the possession of the villagers for years.</p> + +<p>John spoke to the old man concerning the patient, +and advised him that they would soon call to take him +away. They would thus relieve them of the burden, +and endeavor to restore him to health, if it were possible +to do so.</p> + +<p>The old man was thankful for the kind words uttered +by John, and the latter assured him that before +many moons passed he would return and show his +appreciation for their kindness to a fellow creature.</p> + +<p>"But we do not feel that we have done anything +which especially merits praise. He is one like ourselves, +who was in distress, and we helped him."</p> + +<p>"Yes; you have done that which is right. We intend +to reward you not that you should be paid for +doing what is right, but to show that we appreciate +your noble actions," answered John.</p> + +<p>The party, after many wishes and hearty good-byes, +filed out of the village, some of them loath to +go.</p> + +<p>Calmo was silent. He was not the same as before +they marched through the village. John noticed +it, but he wisely refrained from commenting +on the sights they had witnessed. There was cleanliness +and order in Hutoton; and filth and disorder +in Sasite. It was impossible to be unconscious of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188">p. 188</a></span> +the difference between the industry in one place, and +the utter shiftlessness in the other.</p> + +<p>As it required two days to make the return journey, +they were absent from Sasite nearly seven days, +and, according to the calculations, the <i>Pioneer</i> would +be in from Unity within the next two days.</p> + +<p>During the intervening time the boys roamed at +will through the island, and on the second day went +directly south, so as to scour the sea front below +the village.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon, as they were about to return, +they saw a sail, George being the first to catch a +glimpse of it. "The <i>Pioneer</i>," he cried, upon which +they danced about in sheer joy and started for the +village, which was distant several miles.</p> + +<p>They were almost out of breath when they rushed +through the village, and cried out the news. Everybody +was expectant; all were eager to see the vessel +come in and Sutoto was the first to reach the landing.</p> + +<p>During the visit of the boys on the island, John +had a crude dock constructed, and as the <i>Pioneer</i> +was of light draft, this was not a difficult thing to +do, so that the passengers could land from the ship +directly on the solid platform.</p> + +<p>The Chief was among the merry villagers. "Who +is that man with the white hair!" he asked of Uraso.</p> + +<p>The latter was just as much surprised as his questioner, +when he recognized the Professor, and he informed +the Chief of the treat he would experience in +meeting him. "He is the Great Wise man," added +Uraso, "whom everybody loves."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189">p. 189</a></span></p> + +<p>Muro, too, was astounded as the Professor came +down. But a still greater surprise awaited the two +chiefs. Muro's wife hailed him, and then Uraso's +wife waved her handkerchief. This was too much +for them, and waving aside all dignity they rushed +forward to greet them.</p> + +<p>The whole thing had been so admirably arranged, +that no one knew of the affair which had been +planned by John. Sutoto joined in the merriment, +but he was too anxious to see Stut to pay much attention +to the greetings.</p> + +<p>The visitors discreetly refrained from saying a +word to Sutoto, concerning the coming event. Besides +the Chief's wives, there were several other +women, of the Tribes in Wonder Island, together +with some white men and their wives, who had been +invited at the request of Blakely.</p> + +<p>The latter greeted John with that hearty expression +so characteristic of the true commercial man, +and he was not with John a minute before he was +plying all sorts of questions about the resources of +the island, the kind and number of inhabitants the +nature of the soil, and the possibilities of mineral +development.</p> + +<p>The Professor came down and was introduced to +the Chief by Uraso.</p> + +<p>The great burly chief was fascinated. He gazed +on the Professor and almost gasped, then turning +to Uraso he said: "Ah! I know why he is a wise +man."</p> + +<p>To Uraso this remark was indeed a puzzle; to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190">p. 190</a></span> +think that the Chief had discovered the secret of the +wisdom in the Professor! He was quick to ask why +he knew it.</p> + +<p>"Because he has double eyes."</p> + +<p>Uraso laughed, and turned to the Professor, to +whom he related the incident. Instantly the Professor +removed the glasses, and courteously handed +them to the Chief, and Uraso adjusted them to the +Chief's eyes.</p> + +<p>He glanced around, through the lens, and forced +out one expression of delight after the other. He +was oblivious of everything else. He forgot that +there were dozens of the visitors ready in line to be +introduced to him; but all enjoyed the great pleasure +he experienced in the new sight.</p> + +<p>But suddenly he stopped in his enthusiasm, and +with an apology took off the glasses and held them +up, in the act of handing them back. The Professor +returned them, and took another pair from his pocket +which he put on.</p> + +<p>It was not likely that the Chief could have received +a more acceptable present, as his eyesight was failing, +and the glasses seemed like the opening of a new +world to him. Later on the Professor provided a +pair of glasses better adapted to his sight.</p> + +<p>The Chief then became concerned about the comfort +of his guests, so Uraso said: "Do not feel +worried about the visitors. They will sleep on the +vessel where they have comfortable rooms."</p> + +<p>The Chief could hardly believe the statements, as +he muttered: "This is, indeed, wonderful."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191">p. 191</a></span></p> + +<p>It would require pages to record the incidents that +came to his attention about the wonders of these +new people. The surprising thing was, that Uraso, +and the natives of Wonder Island were dressed like +the white people and acted like them, and yet he was +told that all that wonderful change had come about +in a little over two years' time.</p> + +<p>Muro's wife was quickly made acquainted with the +Chief's wife, and the day following she had a consultation +with her. Mida, who was Muro's wife, +said: "I do not know whether or not you know of +Sutoto's affection for Cinda, but we learned about +it, and have come over to attend the ceremony."</p> + +<p>Linnea, the Chief's wife, smiled as Mida spoke to +her. "Yes, I know of it, but the Chief has not yet +been told."</p> + +<p>It seems that they had very curious and at the +same time different customs among the various +tribes, and Mida's object was to learn what their etiquette +called for as to betrothals. Among some of +the Wonder Island tribes, the Chief was the only one +who has the right to consent to the marriage of the +females, although the males could go to other tribes +and secure wives without the consent of the Chief.</p> + +<p>In other tribes the women, the mothers, are the +sole judges, and it is not infrequent for the parents +of the bride to demand a payment, dependent on +the rank or the riches of the father.</p> + +<p>Then the question of ceremonies is always an important +one. It would be sacrilegious to perform +the rite except in exact accordance with the pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192">p. 192</a></span>scribed +rules. Sometimes those rules are so extremely +different to those of another tribe that intermarriage +between members of such tribes is impossible.</p> + +<p>Thus, a Tuolo could never marry a Saboro, nor +could an Illya warrior take an Osaga for a bride. +On all these points the women were adepts. It is +more than likely, however, that Cinda and Sutoto +had all that matter fully understood between them.</p> + +<p>"Did Stut tell you about Sutoto?" asked George.</p> + +<p>Harry laughed. "No; but I have a good one to +tell you. What did he say?"</p> + +<p>"Well, you know he hired Stut to get him a wedding +outfit, and a present?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"When the people left the vessel Sutoto sneaked +back, and hunted up Stut. Of course Stut had the +package all done up, and he is now taking it over to +his hut."</p> + +<p>"I have something better than that. Sutoto is +going to be married to-night."</p> + +<p>"How do you know?"</p> + +<p>"Cinda told one of her girl friends, and it frightened +her so that she told Uraso."</p> + +<p>"Why that would spoil all the plans."</p> + +<p>"So it would, but Uraso told his sister."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure of that?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I am; I was there."</p> + +<p>"What did she say?"</p> + +<p>"She simply said 'I will take care of that.'"</p> + +<p>"Of course she will; she's a brick."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193">p. 193</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Mida</span> had learned the situation. Their customs as +to marriages closely resembled that of the Saboros. +In that tribe the Chief was the sole authority. To +marry without his consent meant exile for the disobedient +warrior, and for the bride as well.</p> + +<p>Sutoto was a member of the Berees, and there +the mother was the matchmaker. She prescribed all +the requirements. The first thing that Mida did was +to insist that the Chief should be informed of the +desires of the young people.</p> + +<p>To the delight of the two women he consented to +the match, and he was then told that the people had +come over from Wonder Island to take part in the +ceremony. But when he was told that they intended +to marry that night, by stealth, his brow was clouded.</p> + +<p>His law was that no one should marry without his +consent, and he could not believe that Cinda could +thus attempt to take the matter into her own hand. +It was hard to think that his own child should be the +first to break his law.</p> + +<p>The women pleaded with him, and then Mida +confided her plan to him. The tribe's marriage ceremony +was a very curious one. First, there must be +a gift of fruit, then of fowl, and next of game. This<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194">p. 194</a></span> +must be brought to the door of the bride by the groom +blindfolded.</p> + +<p>He must remain blindfolded while she prepares +them for the table. Not a word must be spoken, or +they must separate forever. A part of the ceremony +requires that the invited guests are to resort to every +sort of device to make them speak. The slightest +sound by either is a sign that they will quarrel, +and means the end of the affair.</p> + +<p>If they pass this test, the second comes when the +bridegroom's eyes are uncovered. They are then to +converse with each other, and they must not for a +moment relax the talk. Neither has any knowledge +of the time that this test must continue. There must +be no faltering, or hesitancy.</p> + +<p>Mida conferred with John and the boys, as she +told of these necessary requirements, and the boys +laughed as they listened.</p> + +<p>"What is the object of all that?" inquired George.</p> + +<p>John was chuckling at the idea, but it stirred up a +reminiscence. "That is a custom, in some of its +features, that I learned about some tribes in central +Africa. I can see the object of that rite. The taking +of the gifts blindfolded signifies that he enters +the marriage state blindly, and that he must do so +in silence, and without asking any questions."</p> + +<p>"Of course, then, there is not any likelihood of +them quarreling," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is what the Chief's wife said," replied +Mida.</p> + +<p>"But what does all the talking mean?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 1.5em;"> +<a id="illus-195" name="illus-195" /> +<a href="images/illus-p195-large.jpg"> +<img src="images/illus-p195.png" width="395" height="598" +alt="The rites were progressing very satisfactorily" +title="The rites were progressing very satisfactorily" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">"The rites were progressing very satisfactorily"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_196">See p. 196</a>]</p> +</div> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195">p. 195</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is perfectly obvious. To show they can +perfectly agree, even though they do talk."</p> + +<p>"But that is all before the real ceremony itself," +said George. "How do they get married? That is +the main thing."</p> + +<p>"Why," said Mida, "that is part of the marrying."</p> + +<p>"But they haven't promised anything. Marrying +is promising."</p> + +<p>This occasioned another roar of merriment. +"Yes; marriage is a contract under our law, but not +so with these people. The only question with them +is whether they are suited to each other."</p> + +<p>"But suppose they should not want to marry each +other, or one of them should object," interposed +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Ah! don't you see there is where the prospective +bride or groom, in that case has a chance. If, +in the first test he should speak, or in the last trial +she should fail to keep up the conversation, then it +would be all off."</p> + +<p>Mida confided her plans to the Chief and his wife. +They were assured that Cinda would not think of +overriding the well-known laws as to the gifts, and +the two tests, and so it was arranged that Sutoto +should be permitted to bring his offerings, which +he would no doubt do, by stealth, while the Chief +and all the visitors were to partake of the banquet +on board of the vessel that evening.</p> + +<p>Sutoto and Cinda knew of the arrangements for +the banquet, and that appeared to be a suitable oc<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196">p. 196</a></span>casion +for them. When Sutoto appeared with the +gifts he and Cinda were to be arrested by the Chief's +warriors and brought aboard the vessel, charged +with violating the law of the Chief in not first obtaining +his permission.</p> + +<p>The boys remained ashore, and carefully watched +the proceedings. How Sutoto got the presents the +boys did not know, but they had a suspicion that +Cinda had a hand in it. The boys laughed as they +saw what a ridiculously short distance he had to go +in a blindfolded state.</p> + +<p>Securely hidden in what was George's chamber, +where he passed the first night of his captivity, they +saw Sutoto with the offerings. Cinda took them, in +silence, and disappeared, only to return instantly +with the smoking viands.</p> + +<p>"I call that quick work," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes, that's swift cooking," suggested George.</p> + +<p>They ate in silence. "I wonder where the bridesmaid +is who intends to make them talk?"</p> + +<p>"Why don't you see her standing behind Cinda?"</p> + +<p>"You mean the servant?"</p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>This was almost too amusing for the boys. The +rites were progressing very satisfactorily. Then +Cinda removed the bandage, and an ineffable smile +stole over Sutoto's features.</p> + +<p>They commenced to talk. The maid said a few +words, but the lovers paid no attention. The ceremony +was going along just as-a perfect one should, +when four stalwart warriors rushed in and seized<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197">p. 197</a></span> +Sutoto. Cinda knew who they were, and she sprang +at them, as two seized her also.</p> + +<p>One of them addressed a word to Sutoto, and then +spoke to Cinda, and without further ceremony they +were taken out through the open portal, and hurried +to the ship.</p> + +<p>The boys followed at a respectful distance, and +when the pair had reached the deck the boys scrambled +up, and hurriedly made their way to the large +room, or cabin, where the Chief and the visitors were +assembled, and which was brilliantly lighted for the +occasion.</p> + +<p>The criminals were brought before the Chief, who +arose, and with a severe countenance began to upbraid +Sutoto for his crime. Cinda meanwhile +glanced around at the brilliant sight. She saw nothing +to excite fear. Both were free from the warriors +and stood there side by side, a handsome couple, as +every one admitted.</p> + +<p>Sutoto saw the boys. Just like boys are apt to be +on such an occasion, they could not repress their +laughter, although it was a silent exhibition of mirth. +Then Sutoto knew, and so did Cinda, for she was +not too much abashed to look up at Sutoto, while +she leaned over and rested her head against him, +and laid her hand on his arm.</p> + +<p>Then the boys stopped laughing. There was nothing +laughable about it now. It seemed too beautiful +to laugh at, and when the great Chief went over, and +rubbed his nose against Sutoto's every one knew +that the compact was sealed.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198">p. 198</a></span></p> + +<p>I wish it were possible to describe the delight +shown in the eyes of the bride and groom when they +were led to the table containing the wedding gifts +that came to them from Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>"Oh! I am so sorry!" said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Sorry for what? Yes, yes, I know now. We +have nothing to give Sutoto, as our presents." And +George said it with genuine grief.</p> + +<p>Most of the articles exhibited were for the use of +the bride, and designed for the home, of the new +couple; but there was a fine array of the little trinkets +which so delight the feminine heart.</p> + +<p>The party sat down to the feast, with Sutoto and +Cinda at one end of the table, while Mida presided +at the other, the Chief being at her right, and his +wife at her left.</p> + +<p>For the first time in their lives they were to eat +their food with knives and forks. They were adepts +with the sharpened stick, which George had noted, +and there was amusement at the many incidents that +the new order brought forth.</p> + +<p>"I remember," said George, "that the Professor +told us the Italians, about the year 1700, were the +first to use forks."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied John. "As late as the year 1800 +the English did not use the fork, but the knife, for +conveying food to the mouth; but the new-fangled +idea, when once introduced, became universal, soon +after that time; and it was then the custom for travelers +to carry their own knives and forks when traveling."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199">p. 199</a></span></p> + +<p>The Professor said, addressing the Chief: "I am +surprised that you use a fork at the table. While +we do so universally, it was not originally our custom."</p> + +<p>"I can remember," replied the Chief, "when it +was not the habit to use any implement, but all were +required to take food from the same dish with the +hands. But at that time food was not served hot, +but allowed to cool. But we found that the eating +of hot articles became a custom, and then we had +to use the pointed forks."</p> + +<p>"I am curious to know what gives the roast such +a beautiful flavor!" asked the Chief's wife. "I am +told that you do not use leaves for flavoring."</p> + +<p>"No," said Mida. "We now use spices, and the +flavor is made more distinct by adding salt."</p> + +<p>"What kinds of spices are used?"</p> + +<p>"For meats, principally pepper, of which I have +no doubt you have plenty on your island."</p> + +<p>Of course, there was coffee, which grew in abundance +in Wonder Island, and numerous trees of +which had been discovered by the boys of the Chief's +island. When this was brought out, and the natives +first tasted it, there was some doubt on their part as +to its food value.</p> + +<p>Added interest was given to it when the Chief was +induced to try it with a bountiful supply of cream +and sugar. Then these articles attracted their attention.</p> + +<p>"Is this a fruit?" he asked as a lump of sugar was +handed him.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200">p. 200</a></span></p> + +<p>"No, it is made from cane, or from some vegetables."</p> + +<p>"Made from vegetables? How can it be made +from them? There is part of the flavor of fruit, but +I cannot taste any vegetables in it."</p> + +<p>Then the Professor explained that all fruit, as well +as vegetables, had the same taste, and that they took +out only that part and left the other.</p> + +<p>"But what is this white liquid which you use in +the new drink?"</p> + +<p>"It is called 'cream,' and the cream is made from +milk?"</p> + +<p>"And what is milk made of?"</p> + +<p>"It is taken from cows, a large animal, that people +raise for that purpose."</p> + +<p>As there was nothing on the island that was as +large as a cow, or that resembled it in any manner, +the Chief's curiosity was unbounded.</p> + +<p>"I would like to see the animal from which this +was obtained."</p> + +<p>"But we have no animal with us."</p> + +<p>"Then it never spoils?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, it will quickly grow sour and unpleasant +if allowed to remain in a warm place."</p> + +<p>He looked around in bewilderment, and the Professor +seeing his embarrassment, continued: "In +the ship we have a way to prevent the cream and +the milk, as well, from spoiling. We will show you +that."</p> + +<p>Thus one article after the other called for some +comment, and explanation. To the natives from<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201">p. 201</a></span> +Wonder Island this meal was an object lesson of only +a few of the many things which they had learned +from the white people.</p> + +<p>But Sutoto and his bride could not be forgotten. +When the meal was finished, the Professor arose, and +said: "I have some news to impart to you. When +the white people first came to Wonder Island, they +found Uraso, and Muro, and they were the first to +come to our aid against powerful tribes."</p> + +<p>"One of their neighbors had at its head a wise +Chief, Suros, known and respected by friend and +foe alike, and he readily adopted the ideas of the +white men, and offered his tribe to save us from +destruction at the hands of those who were unfriendly."</p> + +<p>"Sutoto was the nephew of the wise Chief Suros, +and I have come to tell you that he is dead, and that +we have been mourning for him."</p> + +<p>Every one who glanced at Sutoto, saw that it +greatly affected him. This address was translated +to the Chief, by Uraso, as the Professor proceeded, +the latter speaking it in such measured sentences, +that it could be quickly grasped by the interpreter.</p> + +<p>"We have all been sad, since his death, and we +shall erect a suitable monument to his memory on +our return."</p> + +<p>The Chief looked at the Professor, and the latter +instantly divined that he wanted some enlightenment.</p> + +<p>"What does the white Chief mean by that?"</p> + +<p>"It is the custom of the white man to put up some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202">p. 202</a></span>thing +that all the people may look at, for years and +years afterwards, so as to remind them that he has +lived, and to tell the people what good he has done."</p> + +<p>"And why should the people do that?"</p> + +<p>"So as to teach people the example, and try to +make them be good as he was."</p> + +<p>"Do your people need to have such examples to +make them do good?"</p> + +<p>"That may not be necessary," replied the Professor, +as he vainly tried to hide the smile that was +trying to manifest itself.</p> + +<p>"But do you not find it necessary to set the people +a good example?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>For a moment he looked around at the company +in bewilderment, and he slowly replied: "No, I do +not think it would do any good. If the people are +bad, and they want to be bad, it will do them no good +to tell them that I have always tried to do right."</p> + +<p>There was a respectful silence, at this avowal, and +the Professor continued: "There are many who +think as you do, and we had one great teacher, called +Confucius, who said: 'Do good not for the hope of +reward, but because it is right.' Then we have also +a precept which, interpreted, means: that happiness +is in the heart."</p> + +<p>"I do not know what that means," he replied.</p> + +<p>"It means that the desire and the wish must come +from within, and not from without." And the savage +nodded an assent.</p> + +<p>"But," continued the Professor, "I have some +news to impart, that makes us all happy again. It is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203">p. 203</a></span> +something that pertains to Sutoto, and I know you +will all join in wishing him all happiness in the good +fortune which Wonder Island brings to him, while +this island is vying with us to make him happy."</p> + +<p>What was this happy thing that the Professor portended? +There was intense eagerness in the eyes +of all who had left Wonder Island when the <i>Pioneer</i> +sailed away, three weeks before.</p> + +<p>"I want to present to you Sutoto, the new Chief +of the Berees." The Professor could get no further. +George and Harry were wild with excitement, +and they bounded over to him and actually hugged +him. Poor Cinda did not for the moment know what +all this excitement meant.</p> + +<p>She supposed that this was the white man's part +of the ceremony, and quietly submitted. But she +was quickly informed, and as she glanced at her +father and mother, and the people came by and affectionately +greeted them, she was so happy that +tears actually flowed.</p> + +<p>Then John came forward with a large box, which +he carefully opened, and drew forth two packages, +one of which he unwrapped, while Mida took the +strings from the other.</p> + +<p>"We want to present you these tokens, the presents +of George and Harry. You are to wear these +as an emblem of your authority." And George and +Mida placed the most beautiful crown shaped hats on +the heads of the couple.</p> + +<p>"Is this part of the ceremony too?" asked Cinda, +as she slyly glanced at Sutoto.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204">p. 204</a></span></p> + +<p>It is impossible to say who were the most surprised +people, the boys or Sutoto, since these presents +had been prepared without their knowledge, +and it atoned in a way for their neglect in not thinking +of the gifts before.</p> + +<p>But there were also other agreeable surprises in +store for them. The wives of Uraso and Muro led +Cinda to the table on which the presents were exposed, +and also exhibited the many beautiful garments +which had been prepared for her.</p> + +<p>Her bewilderment was still greater when she was +directed to turn, and found herself standing in front +of a tall oval mirror which the boys had brought up, +under the Professor's directions.</p> + +<p>Her image in the mirror startled the bride beyond +measure, and she innocently asked Sutoto whether +this was also a part of the wedding ceremony.</p> + +<p>According to the custom of the tribe, the couple +had to go through the ordeal of the tribal dance, +and when the boys learned of this they regretted +that provision had not been made for the event. +They were now in for everything which belonged to +this unique wedding. The entire party broke up, +and the boys regretted that the affair came to an end +so soon.</p> + +<p>As they filed down the steps and marched along +the dock to the shore they noticed that the entire +village was shining brightly with hundreds of the +native candles, and everywhere were the well-known +lamps, which the boys knew came from Wonder Island.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205">p. 205</a></span></p> + +<p>"What does all that mean?" asked Harry, as John +came up.</p> + +<p>"That means the dance, that is the final requirement +of the wedding ceremony."</p> + +<p>"But where are the dancers? Are we to take +part?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, no; no one who has partaken of the feast +is permitted to take part."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is certainly queer."</p> + +<p>"Not more so than among many white people, +where the dancers are those who have been specially +selected for the purpose, and are professionals. In +Biblical times the Jews had dancing as part of the +religious ceremony, and that which took place in +the Temple was participated in only by special ones +set apart for that purpose."</p> + +<p>No one was in sight, however, and the Chief led +the entire company to a large green space, not far +from his dwelling, and after a circle had been +formed, they heard a peculiar humming sound, which +seemed to be all about them, and this increased in +intensity, and when at its height, two dozen or more +of the native girls rushed in with a gliding, swaying +motion, and circled around with peculiar grace, +continuously giving forth the weird sounds that have +been described.</p> + +<p>It was intensely dramatic, and fascinated the boys. +They had never seen anything so remarkable in its +character, and for once they were unable to question +its meaning, or ask for information concerning +it.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206">p. 206</a></span></p> + +<p>For an hour this continued, until the boys thought +the performers would certainly drop dead with fatigue; +then, one after the other disappeared, and +with each disappearance the sound of the humming +grew less until but one remained. In some way, +unknown to the boys she made the last circle around +the green, bearing a wreath of leaves, and as she +approached Sutoto and Cinda, wheeled about, and +threw it over them.</p> + +<p>"That is the final act," said John. "See, they are +both within the wreath, and it signifies that they are +bound together forever, even as the wreath, which +has no end."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207">p. 207</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">But</span> the boys knew that they had some important +things to attend to. The pleasures of life have an +important part, but they were now engaged in serious +work. The fact that they had accomplished so much +was a great incentive to go on and investigate other +things which were still mysteries, and which might +be of great value to them.</p> + +<p>The coming of the Professor had been a great +pleasure to them. The developments of the past two +weeks were ever in their minds and they could not +repress the curiosity to visit the other islands, if +such could be found.</p> + +<p>Now that Sutoto was married they knew he would +not be with them for a time, and they had not talked +over the future plans. When, the next day, they +and the Professor and John were together to consider +the next step, it was with joy that the Professor +informed them of the purpose of John to continue +the investigations throughout that part of the +ocean.</p> + +<p>"It seems that your interpretation of Walter's +note was entirely wrong," said John. "In any event +it is certain that we are more than thirty leagues +from Wonder Island, and not in the direction he +pointed out."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208">p. 208</a></span></p> + +<p>"Then it is likely that if there is an island which +will fit the place, it must be to the north," said +Harry.</p> + +<p>"That would be a natural conclusion," he answered. +"It has occurred to me that the natural +place for an island would be to the north."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at him with surprise. "What +makes you think so?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"I judged so, merely from the conformation of this +island."</p> + +<p>"What is there in the island that makes you think +so?"</p> + +<p>"You have noticed that the island is very narrow +east and west, and very much longer north and +south."</p> + +<p>"Yes; but that still does not make it plain to +me."</p> + +<p>"The island may be like the ridge of a mountain +cropping out of the ocean. For instance, the Andes +and the Sierras in the United States run north and +south. Now suppose the ocean should cover the +land, those mountains would form islands which +would naturally be north and south of each other, +and the islands themselves would be longer north +and south than east and west."</p> + +<p>"I see the idea. But we might find them to the +south of this island, as well."</p> + +<p>"Certainly; but as the northern section brings us +nearer the supposed thirty leagues, we should, I +think, make the investigation there first."</p> + +<p>It was necessary that Sutoto should go back to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209">p. 209</a></span> +Wonder Island. His position as Chief of the Berees +made this essential. Furthermore, the age of the +Professor made traveling and the hardships of investigating +on foot a hard task, and besides it was +necessary to take back the visitors.</p> + +<p>"I have suggested to the Chief that we shall return, +and have invited him to accompany us, and I +am gratified to say that he has accepted. We shall, +therefore, be ready to return within a few days," +said the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Have you said anything to him about the contemplated +visit to Hutoton?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"No; but I shall do so at once."</p> + +<p>"Oh! that will give us an opportunity to take the +paralytic back with us," suggested Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes; that will be the reason for our stopping +there."</p> + +<p>"Wouldn't it be a good idea to sail to the north, +and investigate in that direction, on our way home?" +remarked George.</p> + +<p>"That has occurred to me."</p> + +<p>The Chief gave careful instructions to his son, +Calmo, in view of his proposed trip, and informed +the Professor that he was anxious to accompany +them at the earliest opportunity.</p> + +<p>Two days thereafter, the entire party boarded the +ship, and the course was set for the northern part +of the island. There the Chief had the first opportunity +to see the dreadful place where the criminals +of his community had been sent.</p> + +<p>There was no resentment on the part of the con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210">p. 210</a></span>victs. +On the other hand, there was the most effusive +welcome extended, and when the Chief saw the +happiness and prosperity there, which he could not +help but contrast with his own people, he was +amazed.</p> + +<p>The unfortunate patient was carefully taken to +the ship, and during his removal did not in the least +indicate by any sign that he knew what was going +on about him.</p> + +<p>John took many stores from the ship, and particularly +garments, and articles of food for the people. +All participated in the division, and the old +man was delighted when he saw the gifts, the more +so when John told him that they would soon be +visited and other stores provided.</p> + +<p>When the rolling motion of the boat was felt by +the stricken man, he showed the first symptoms of +consciousness. Sometimes he would look about him, +and try to grasp something. On several occasions +the Professor saw him open his eyes with a sort of +questioning look.</p> + +<p>But we cannot dwell too long on the result of the +patient's progress, at this time. John felt, as did +the Professor, that from that man they would be +able to learn something, if he could ever regain his +faculties. The boys gathered that much from the +conversation, so that, for the present, he must be left +to the tender care of the Professor, until later events +are recorded.</p> + +<p>From Hutoton the ship sailed directly north, it +being understood that if no land was sighted before<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211">p. 211</a></span> +evening it would be useless to go farther in that direction. +The <i>Pioneer</i> was a good sailer, and could +easily, with a fair wind, make ten miles an hour, +so they would have fully seven hours' run to test out +their theory of land in that direction.</p> + +<p>Before five o'clock John, who was constantly on +the watch, came to the Professor and remarked that +he believed the haze to the north indicated the presence +of land. This was soon communicated to the +boys, and there was no more idleness from that time +on.</p> + +<p>John's theory was correct. Slowly certain fixed +objects appeared and some outlines that looked like +mountains, and the boys could not repress their +anxiety at the anticipated shore.</p> + +<p>"Then we were right, after all," said Harry.</p> + +<p>John smiled, as he replied: "I do not know; the +calculations have not yet been made."</p> + +<p>"I would like to know how our position can be +found out from an examination of the sun," remarked +George.</p> + +<p>"That will require a long answer to explain fully +but I shall try to answer it in a simple manner. The +sailor takes an observation of the sun in two directions, +namely, north and south, and east and west. +You know, of course, that the sun moves north in +the summer and south in the winter, and that the +extreme southern point is in midwinter, Dec. 20: +that in the spring, or March 20, it is directly above +the equator, and in midsummer, or, on June 20, it +is as far north as it can go."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212">p. 212</a></span></p> + +<p>"You mean," said George, "that it would be north +of the equator."</p> + +<p>"As we have the same calendar over the entire +world, it is true everywhere. The difference is, of +course, that summer and winter, and spring and +autumn are reversed, north and south of the equator. +All estimates as to locations are made by measuring +angles."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 381px;"> +<a id="illus-fig15" name="illus-fig15" /> +<a href="#p_212"> +<img src="images/illus-fig15-p212.png" width="381" height="276" +alt="Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun." +title="Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 15. <span class="u">Getting</span> <span class="u">Angle</span> +<span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">Position</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Sun</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Then it must be something like surveying?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the same principles are applied. Here is a +sketch, which shows the earth A, and B is the equatorial +line. C is the position of the sun on September +20, or on June 20."</p> + +<p>"Why are they in the same position on both +days?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the sun crosses the equator September 20,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213">p. 213</a></span> +on its way south, and then it again recrosses the +equator coming north six months afterwards. On +either of those days, if a person should stand at +D, and look at the sun, there would be a line E, +which projects out from the earth to the sun, and +that is called the equatorial line."</p> + +<p>"It is exactly at right angles to F, which passes +through the poles. Now the drawing shows two +other positions, namely G and H. These represent +the extreme points of the travel of the sun north +and south, or the positions that the sun occupy on +Dec. 20, and June 20 of each year."</p> + +<p>"I see," said Harry. "The points G and H are +just 23 degrees north and south of the equator."</p> + +<p>"That is correct, and there is another thing which +can be learned from their positions."</p> + +<p>"I know what it is."</p> + +<p>"What?"</p> + +<p>"It gives another line, or angle."</p> + +<p>"So now we have two angles, this, and the equatorial +line. Then, we know the exact distance of the +sun from the earth, and this gives the first measurement, +and with the angle formed by the line I, taken +in connection with the line E, it is easy to determine +just where, or how far the sun is to the north or to +the south, and if you did not, for instance, know +the time of the year, a man could by such a measurement, +tell, by the angle thus formed, the exact date."</p> + +<p>"I understand that now," remarked George. +"The sailor, in getting the angle, simply measures +that, and if he knows where the sun is on that day<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214">p. 214</a></span> +he will then have two angles, one that he knows beforehand, +and the other that he finds out by looking +at the sun."</p> + +<p>"That is correct. The Nautical Chart gives all +that information, so that it saves a large amount of +work in making the calculations."</p> + +<p>"That gives the way to determine positions north +and south. But how about east and west?"</p> + +<p>"In the same manner exactly so far as the angle +measurements are concerned, but in this case, instead +of taking the time, in days or in months, as in +reckoning north and south, we must take time in +minutes, and to do that the entire globe is laid off +in minutes and degrees, which the nautical tables +give, and the mariner knows when he obtains a certain +angle just how far east or west he is located by +the chart."</p> + +<p>"But if he has no chart?"</p> + +<p>"Then he must figure out the position for himself, +which he can do if he has what is called Greenwich, +or standard time, and has, also the correct time of +the day where his ship is."</p> + +<p>Land was beyond; there was no question of that. +It rose out of the water higher than the island they +had just left, which the boys had named <i>Venture</i> Island.</p> + +<p>The Chief knew nothing of the land before them. +He had told John that years before he learned that +there was a land where there were many bad people, +who killed and ate each other, but he did not know +the exact direction.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215">p. 215</a></span></p> + +<p>The vessel was sailed along the coast, and the +field glasses were used to scan the land. It had the +appearance of the other islands which they now +knew. Vegetation was magnificent, and growing +everywhere, but there was not the sign of a habitation +anywhere.</p> + +<p>After an hour's sail they rounded a point, and +beyond was the first cove, or indentation along the +coast. To that John directed the course of the vessel, +and they ran in very close, since he knew from +the abrupt sloping beach that it must be a deep bay.</p> + +<p>The men could scarcely man the boat quickly +enough. A dozen of them, together with John, Muro +and Uraso, took the first boat, while a second boat +was filled with the warriors who also were accompanied +by some of the natives of Venture island.</p> + +<p>The Professor and the others remained on board, +while the party made the preliminary examinations +of the immediate neighborhood. John formed two +parties, one under command of Muro, and the other +of Uraso. The boys were with Uraso, while he was +with Muro. The object was to find out as quickly +as possible what they would have to meet, and the +result would enable them to determine the future +plans.</p> + +<p>"It is understood, now," remarked John, "that +the two exploring parties shall take the two courses +outlined, Muro and his men, to go directly east, +while Uraso will take a course to the northeast, and +proceed in that direction for three hours, and then +the two parties are to turn toward each other, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216">p. 216</a></span> +mutually report. This will give us an opportunity +to find out something, unless the island is a very +large one, and requires subsequent exploration to +ascertain whether it is inhabited."</p> + +<p>John had purposely selected the route to the east, +as he saw the high elevation in that direction, and +George laughed, as he said, slyly: "John is still +after the caves," and Harry laughed, as he recalled +the keenness with which John had arranged the trips.</p> + +<p>John did make his way to the highest points, and +soon learned, from the observations, that the island +was inhabited, but the trip of the boys was more exciting, +so we shall more particularly detail their +adventures.</p> + +<p>Before they had gone two hours evidences grew +thick and fast that tribes inhabited the island. +Muro, and the different men, were continually finding +traces, none of them, however, which indicated +that the people were near at hand, or that the telltale +marks had been recently made.</p> + +<p>But now signs began to be apparent to the boys +also; the bones of animals, lying around the spot +where a fire had been gave them the first real sensation. +Muro glanced at the boys, and at some bones, +and the action on his part was so peculiar, that +George quietly remarked:</p> + +<p>"Muro looked so peculiarly at me when I glanced +at the bones, over there, that I wonder what he +meant?"</p> + +<p>"I saw it too," answered Harry. "Let us have +another look at them;" and acting on the suggestion<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217">p. 217</a></span> +they went over. Muro followed. They did not appear +to pay any attention to him; but he was quick +to join them, and as he did so he slowly nodded his +head.</p> + +<p>"Are they human remains?" said Harry, as he +turned to Muro, questioningly.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and this is not the first we have seen," he +answered. "We may find them now at any time. +I am now sure that there are several tribes here."</p> + +<p>"What makes you believe so?"</p> + +<p>"Because we have found different kinds of hair, +which is usually the best evidence of the differences +in the tribes, as each has its own peculiarity."</p> + +<p>"Savages, and cannibals!" said George reflectively.</p> + +<p>"But we must go on. We have still an hour in +this direction before we turn to the south and east," +said Harry.</p> + +<p>There was more caution now exercised, and the +speed was accordingly reduced, in view of the especial +care which they took. In order to understand +what happened the reader should know something of +the nature of the country.</p> + +<p>Some places in Wonder Island had the same sort +of timber and undergrowth, and they went through +some dense forests, in which vines and small brush +made traveling difficult. They had to cut their way +through some of this vegetation.</p> + +<p>The land was not low or flat. If it had been there +would have been a dense jungle. Sometimes they +passed through half-grown forests, and these places<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218">p. 218</a></span> +were the most difficult to scour, because an enemy +might be within fifty feet, and not be discovered.</p> + +<p>It was in just such a place that they received their +first surprise; a shower of arrows, so thick that +they instantly knew it could not have been made by +only a dozen or so. Some of the arrows found their +marks, and two of the men sank down, while Muro +coolly drew one of the crude missiles from his arm.</p> + +<p>"Drop down!" cried Muro.</p> + +<p>There was not a savage in sight; still a number of +arrows fell around them. "Remain quiet, and I will +find them?" said Muro, as he crept forward quietly +through the dense grass.</p> + +<p>George and Harry followed, although it was evident +it was not Muro's wish. Before they had gone +ten feet, Muro turned, and pointed ahead. "They +are there; at least one party. Get ready for a +shot."</p> + +<p>The savages, noting the quiet in their front, now +cautiously peered through the bush, and the boys +saw the most hideous countenances. "We might +give them a round," said Muro, and after carefully +aiming, the guns spoke.</p> + +<p>The simultaneous explosion of the three guns, +raised pandemonium on all sides. They were now +surrounded by at least a hundred of the savages, but +for some reason the little party of twenty awed them, +and instead of making a charge, they rushed toward +the place where the three victims of the gunshots +lay.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 1.5em;"> +<a id="illus-218" name="illus-218" /> +<a href="images/illus-p218-large.jpg"> +<img src="images/illus-p218.png" width="395" height="619" +alt="She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror" +title="She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">"She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_204">See p. 204</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>Muro's arm was bleeding profusely, and George<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219">p. 219</a></span> +quickly bound it up, while the enemy were hesitating. +"Do not shoot, unless they rush at us. I will talk: +to them, and try to get an understanding."</p> + +<p>Then, in a loud voice Muro called to them, saying +they were friends, and not enemies. There was no +response. Thinking that they knew nothing of the +dialect, he tried another, and the only response was +the evident determination of the savages to attack +again.</p> + +<p>The boys and Muro could plainly hear their chattering, +but the latter said that what they were saying +was not intelligible to him, and that they must +now prepare for a fight.</p> + +<p>"Get your guns ready, and be prepared for a +charge. If they come so close that you cannot use +the guns, then we must be prepared to meet them +with our knives, and we must all stand together, and +not become separated."</p> + +<p>Instead of attacking, however, there was silence, +after the first excitement. "They are trying to find, +out what struck their comrades when we fired," remarked +Muro.</p> + +<p>"Yes; I think it was a big surprise."</p> + +<p>"I recall," continued Muro, "when we had our +first brush with you that we could not find the arrow +which we supposed was made by your bullet. That +frightened us more than anything else."</p> + +<p>There was not the slightest movement on the part +of an enemy for a full half hour. This is the most +trying sort of tactics. If you can see the enemy, or +note that he is doing something, there is some relief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220">p. 220</a></span> +to the tension, but where he can neither be seen, nor +heard, it tries the nerves of the strongest man.</p> + +<p>Muro knew that this inactivity on the part of the +savages had its purpose. Probably, they intended to +remain there until night, and overwhelm them in +the rush. Muro had other plans, however.</p> + +<p>"We cannot remain here. We must make the attack. +Remain here, and permit me to feel out their +positions, and also to determine what they are doing." +He glided away from them noiselessly, and +how he kept the tall grass and weeds from swaying, +the boys could not determine at that time.</p> + +<p>It did not take Muro long to see the situation. +They were surrounded by a cordon of savages, and +while spying, saw a new lot of them coming up. The +plan was plain enough, and it meant a fight now, or +a night defense.</p> + +<p>When he returned, he had his plans formed. +"They are being reinforced, and we have, probably, +a hundred and fifty, or more, around us. John is, +no doubt, too far away to come to our assistance, +and our only hope is to attack them now, so we +might as well take the necessary steps."</p> + +<p>While on his investigations Muro had discovered a +fallen tree, which was not more than fifty feet to +their left. "We must reach that tree, and by digging +a shallow trench at one side, can easily defend +ourselves, as well as pick them off at our leisure."</p> + +<p>Slowly they moved, in crawling attitudes, toward +the place indicated. The tree was not a large one, +but it made an admirable breastworks, and with their<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221">p. 221</a></span> +knives each man dug out a shallow hole, piling up +the earth beyond the hole, so as to shelter them from +the arrows, which they knew would be rained on +them.</p> + +<p>This work required a full half hour, and when +it was completed, and Muro had satisfied himself +that each one was supplied with sufficient ammunition, +he was ready for the second stage of the game.</p> + +<p>"We must attract them, by some form of action. +I will take three with me, and crawl forward, until +we can catch glimpse of some of the watchers. +Those we will attack, and then fall back, and do the +same on the other sides."</p> + +<p>Muro indicated those who were to follow, and +after going only a short distance the boys heard the +shots, then four more. This brought the sounds of +voices from every direction. Muro and his men, +during the excitement, crawled to another portion +of the line, and repeated the manœuver.</p> + +<p>This, for the moment threw them into consternation, +but they quickly rallied, and now it was plain +that they were pressing forward to rush the position +occupied by the boys. It was now obvious that the +precaution of making the defensive position, as +Muro had suggested, was their only salvation.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222">p. 222</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Nothing</span> could describe the uproar that the second +volley created in the ranks of the besiegers. Yell +after yell came from the hundreds of throats that +were about them. It was now war to the end. +There could be no compromise.</p> + +<p>While the boys had been in many difficult and trying +experiences before, this was the first time that +they grew pale, and had strong misgivings. They +knew, however, that the object of the shrieks and +yells of savages were for the purpose of driving +terror into the hearts of their foes.</p> + +<p>In this respect it might not thus affect them, but +when they considered the overwhelming numbers +around them, we cannot blame them for feeling +alarmed.</p> + +<p>They were coming forward, and on all sides. +"Remember, what John used to tell us: it is the shots +that hit which count. Fire deliberately, and keep +together. Do not use your revolvers until they are +close, and you cannot use the guns."</p> + +<p>Closer and closer they came, and Muro and the +men were silent. "Now, get ready! Shoot deliberately!"</p> + +<p>The first salvo was fired. It was a staggering<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223">p. 223</a></span> +blow. They reloaded, while the enemy was trying +to recover, and the second volley belched forth.</p> + +<p>Then, when the execution was noticed, and they +saw their people fall all about them, they charged +forward in one mass, and the boys looked at each +other, for a moment, and George reached over and +gave Harry's hand one pressure, and then turned +away and began to fire as fast as he could aim the +weapon.</p> + +<p>They were still coming on. The demons were +nearly up to the log. For some reason the savages +did not heed those who fell. It had not struck terror +into their hearts, as the boys hoped. How would +this end? The enemy was now too close to make +their guns of any use. The revolvers were drawn, +and the cracks from them became almost a continuous +roar.</p> + +<p>They were still coming. Soon the ammunition +would be gone. The boys realized this. They were +determined to die fighting, and they began to feel +for their knives which must be the final act in the +great tragedy.</p> + +<p>Then they heard something louder than the cracks +of their own weapons and the shrieks of the devils +around them. Some one was shooting. They could +see the startled faces of the savages, as they turned +and swung around. The attack ceased, and Muro +sprang up on the log, with a yell.</p> + +<p>Could he be mad? The boys were stupefied. +"Come on!" cried Muro. "Here is John!"</p> + +<p>This announcement, coming at an unexpected mo<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224">p. 224</a></span>ment, +was such a reaction to the poor boys, that they +could hardly raise themselves. Another volley; they +could hear it now. There was another yell from +the savages, and then they could be seen rushing +through the brush.</p> + +<p>The men with John ran up, and John struggled +forward through the weeds. "Are you hurt?" +asked John, as he sprang to the side of the boys.</p> + +<p>"No! no!" cried George, and he fell down, overcome +with the excitement, while Harry could not +speak for a moment.</p> + +<p>"That was a close call," said John. "We heard +the first shots an hour ago, and we turned to take this +direction. Then we heard nothing for a long time, +and as we were coming over the hill beyond the +firing commenced but we could see nothing, so we +hurried forward and soon saw the smoke, and then +the savages coming from the bush, and directly to +the east we noticed fifty or more coming this way, +but they are not here yet."</p> + +<p>"I wonder how many attacked us?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"It is difficult to tell, but it is safe to say that +there were at least two hundred in the fight. Oh, +no; the boys will not follow them up very far," said +John, as Harry looked apprehensively toward the +direction that John's men were going.</p> + +<p>He blew the whistle, and gradually the men straggled +in, reporting that the savages appeared terror-stricken, +as they had had no idea that there was +another force in the neighborhood, and they did not +stop to consider the possible number.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225">p. 225</a></span></p> + +<p>"I am sorry for these poor people," remarked +John. "We must hunt up the wounded."</p> + +<p>Searchers were set to work, and the wounded, +when found, were carried to an open place beyond, +and their hurts examined and bandaged. At first +terror showed itself on their faces, but as John and +Muro, together with the boys, washed their wounds, +and wrapped bandages around the limbs, they lay +there and marveled at the actions of their enemies.</p> + +<p>More than two dozen had been killed, and forty-two +wounded, nearly all in the legs or bodies, those +having arm wounds being enabled to get away.</p> + +<p>On Muro's orders a watch was set on the movements +of the savages, and from time to time reports +were brought in concerning them. They had retreated +eastwardly, and were now off less than a half +mile, where they were assembled, and evidently debating +the situation.</p> + +<p>John and Muro well knew that their present force, +now numbering forty-one, and all well armed, would +be more than a match for the savage force, still, it +would not be advisable to prolong the explorations +for the day, as it was desirable to report the situation +of affairs to the Professor.</p> + +<p>After making the sufferers comfortable they +started on the march back to the ship. During the +period while caring for the wounded, John and +Muro tried to engage the savages in conversation +but all attempts to learn their language failed, and, +as they were about to leave, John said to Muro:</p> + +<p>"Do you think that man is a chief?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226">p. 226</a></span></p> + +<p>"I know he is; I spotted him from the first, and +saw from his actions, and the fact of his being +obeyed, that he was a man of some authority."</p> + +<p>"I agree with you," said Uraso, "that he is the +one we must take with us."</p> + +<p>A litter was quickly improvised and the savage +gently laid on, and with this, as their only encumbrance, +they started for the return march. Five of +the men had been wounded, all in the arms and body, +and none of them dangerously, so that there was no +trouble in the march.</p> + +<p>They filed out to the west, avoiding as much exposure +as possible. Muro's men had been on the +observing line, and at Muro's suggestion they occasionally +showed themselves, so as to assure the natives +that they were still holding their ground.</p> + +<p>As the two forces were starting for the ship, Muro +prepared a decoy, so that the savages could see what +appeared to be two figures. Then he hurriedly told +John what he had done, and the march began, as +rapidly as possible, at first, and a rear guard was +provided to watch the movements of their enemies.</p> + +<p>Two miles beyond the scene of the fight the party +halted, and George was assisted to climb a tree, +from which point they might be seen.</p> + +<p>"I can see them plainly," he called down. "They +are now around the wounded. I cannot see what +they are doing, but there is a big crowd."</p> + +<p>He waited for some time, and then cried out: "I +believe they are coming this way. I think it is time<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227">p. 227</a></span> +for us to be moving." And George slipped down, +as John gave the order to go on.</p> + +<p>The rear guard, with John and Uraso, were now +following up behind the marchers. "Go on, without +stopping," he said, as they took up their positions.</p> + +<p>The boys begged to be permitted to remain with +the rear guard, but John refused to have them exposed. +In an hour and a half they ascended an elevation +from which the ship could be seen in the bay +to the southwest.</p> + +<p>During that time only once had the runner returned +from John to notify them of the progress of +the natives. The last information, therefore, was +about a half hour before, and it was now obvious that +the savages were determined to follow them up, and +this would bring them within view of the vessel.</p> + +<p>Before descending the last declivity that led to the +beach, John and the Chief appeared, and told the +boys that all of the tribe was behind them, and that +the cause of the pursuit was, unquestionably, to recover +the Chief who had been taken along.</p> + +<p>At the suggestion of John three shots were fired +to attract the attention of those on the boat, while +several of the fleetest runners speeded down the +beach and quickly advised the Professor of the situation.</p> + +<p>Two boat loads of warriors were quickly sent to +shore, and when John and the party with him came +up to the beach, the savages had reached the crest +of the hill, and ranged up in line, but halted to witness +the spectacle before them.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228">p. 228</a></span></p> + +<p>The wounded chief was taken to the vessel, and +the Professor immediately gave him the best care, +but he remarked: "This man is desperately +wounded, and will require the best of attention to enable +him to pull through."</p> + +<p>All the men were finally placed on board, and their +experiences related. An immediate consultation +was held. John and the boys insisted on remaining +with a sufficient force to enable them to carry out +their explorations, but the Professor seemed to oppose +it.</p> + +<p>"I quite agree with you that, from what John has +said, there are reasons aside from the cannibals +over there, why we should explore it from one end to +the other."</p> + +<p>The boys cast a side glance at John. Did John +find something that made him so insistent to remain? +They repressed their curiosity, however, for the time. +To their minds they thought the natives were the +incentive, notwithstanding the terrible fight they had +just engaged in, although they were willing to take +the risk.</p> + +<p>But it was finally settled. John was to have the +force now on board, and he, with the boys, was to +explore, and, if need be, to conquer the natives on the +island. The <i>Pioneer</i> would, in the meantime, sail to +Wonder Island, and return with food and ammunition, +and reinforcements.</p> + +<p>There was thus left at their disposal fifty-five men, +with a fair supply of ammunition. Uraso and Muro +were to be of the party, as events just related showed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229">p. 229</a></span> +that there was serious work to do before they might +be able to return.</p> + +<p>That night, while making the final arrangements +on the vessel, the boys sought John, and asked him +more particularly concerning his trip.</p> + +<p>"We have had no opportunity to speak to you, +but the Professor said you had learned enough about +the island to determine you to explore it fully," said +George.</p> + +<p>"That is true. I have found what I believe to be +the identical spot described in the charts, and I have +found the solution, I think, of Walter's note and of +the skull."</p> + +<p>This was, indeed, something of importance to +them, but John informed them that for certain +reasons it might be better to defer the explanation +until they had made the final explorations.</p> + +<p>The boys knew he must have some pretty good +reason for thus explaining and laying the matter +before them, and they forebore further questionings.</p> + +<p>The next morning, when all the supplies and ammunition +had been taken off, and the final good-byes +were said, the party stood on the shore while the +<i>Pioneer</i> slowly moved out, and was soon racing before +the wind on its way to Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>A council was held before they attempted to march +into the interior. "I have every reason to believe +that the band which we met yesterday is in the immediate +vicinity, and that they have been watching our +movements," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"In that case," remarked Uraso, "I favor the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230">p. 230</a></span> +route to the east, which, while it may offer us still +greater obstacles, in view of our observations there, +still it might enable us the more quickly to overcome +the tribe we have just met."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other significantly. "I +wonder what Uraso can be talking about? There +must be something very much out of the usual, in +the eastern part of the island."</p> + +<p>"I am interested in knowing what he means by +'the observation' they made there," responded +Harry.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231">p. 231</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX</h2> + +<h3>FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND</h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">When</span> the <i>Pioneer</i> sailed for Unity it was with the +understanding that she was to return within a week +or ten days. At a cliff in the headland, which jutted +out on the southern side of the bay, a sort of post +office station was established, because if the ship +should return while they were in the interior, it +would be well for the commander of the <i>Pioneer</i> to +know where to go in the event that the eastern or +the northern coast should be much more convenient +for John and his party.</p> + +<p>It was nearly a hundred miles from the Island to +Wonder Island, and there would be no occasion for +the Professor to hurry back a relief, except to supply +additional ammunition, because they did not for an +instant expect to meet a tribe that would give them +such a fight.</p> + +<p>There was still enough to provide, probably five +rounds per man, so that it made them a pretty respectable +fighting force. The weather was such that +the force on the island did not require tents for +shelter, and with the native fruits the party could +well subsist for quite a time without assistance.</p> + +<p>It was agreed that the party should keep together, +and no straggling be permitted, as it was evident +they had a very bitter foe to deal with. The severely<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232">p. 232</a></span> +wounded Chief, who was taken along, was under the +personal charge of the Professor, the understanding +being that as soon as his wounds were satisfactorily +progressing, an effort would be made to open up +communication with him, and through that channel +they could reach the inhabitants of the island, and +thus advise them that they did not mean to do them +an injury.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if that isn't the real reason why John +does not want to go for the fellows who attacked us," +asked George.</p> + +<p>"That may be so. It never occurred to me before. +It seems to me, though," answered Harry, "that +they will get but little out of that fellow in a week's +time. You know they are very much reserved at +times."</p> + +<p>"Or stubborn," suggested George.</p> + +<p>One of the things that John was careful about related +to the organization of the force, so that it would +at all times be ready for action. In order to carry +out this idea and make it effectual, he divided the +fighters into two squads of twenty-five men each, +under the commands of Uraso and Muro, the arrangement +being such that one squad should have +charge of the patrolling and picketing for a period +of two days, and then the other should take charge +for a like time.</p> + +<p>There was always the most perfect accord between +the two Chiefs, and John wisely allowed them to arrange +those matters in such a way as would be most +satisfactory to them.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233">p. 233</a></span></p> + +<p>Before noon the following day the force marched +out from Security Harbor, as they had named the +bay, and took up the trail made by John and his +party two days before.</p> + +<p>"We have names for the two islands, and for +about all the principal points, but we have no name +for this place," said Harry, as they were marching +along.</p> + +<p>"Quite true," answered George, reflectively. +Then, with a laugh, he said: "As they have cannibals +here, according to the evidence so far gathered, +I think <i>Maneta</i> would be a name that would +tell the story about as well as anything." And +George laughed as he made the suggestion.</p> + +<p>He was an adept in applying names, being generally +the first to make suggestions in that direction, +and he was rarely at a loss for an apt designation.</p> + +<p>The route was over a country which was rich in +vegetation. During the first ten miles the ascent +was gradual, and the fruit and nuts were abundant, +while new species of trees and flowers attracted the +boys.</p> + +<p>"Harry and I have found a plant that has flies +and other insects all over the leaves, and I believe +it actually catches and holds. Here is a sample," +said George, as he presented a branch to John.</p> + +<p>John examined it carefully. Then he said: +"This is a plant of which we have several in the +United States, but none which are as active. This is +called Venus' Fly Trap."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234">p. 234</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is curious," remarked Harry. "I wouldn't +have paid any attention to it but I saw a fly +alight on it, and these little feelers seemed to close +around it, and hold +it."</p> + +<p>"It works on that +plan exactly. It is in +that way it gets its +food."</p> + +<p>"But why should +the feelers be able to +grasp the fly the moment +it touches the +leaf?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 213px;"> +<a id="illus-fig16" name="illus-fig16" /> +<a href="#p_234"> +<img src="images/illus-fig16-p234.png" width="213" height="205" +alt="Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap." title="Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 16. <span class="u">Venus'</span> <span class="u">Fly</span>-<span class="u">Trap</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Do you recall +about what the Professor told you of the peculiar +power of plants to absorb food of particular kinds +by a faculty called <i>irritability</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I remember."</p> + +<p>"By means of that, plants are enabled to select +just the kinds of substances that they want, and can +digest. If you will carefully notice the leaf, after it +has seized a fly it will be observed that the leaf +exudes a watery substance, and that has the property +of digesting the fly, or of converting the liquid part +of the insect into a form of food which is taken +through the leaf, and from the leaf it goes into the +plant itself."</p> + +<p>"I thought plants got their food from the roots +only?"</p> + +<p>"Leaves are just the same as roots. They are<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_235" id="p_235">p. 235</a></span> +terminals, and moisture as well as foods, such, for +instance, as nitrogen, is absorbed and fed to the plant +through the leaves."</p> + +<p>As they progressed they could see evidences of +human occupation, and in many places the remains +of fire. It was while making a detour from the regular +route taken by John that they saw the first +startling thing.</p> + +<p>It was found at a place where a rude hut was discovered +in a dilapidated condition. Directly behind +the hut was a raised sort of dais, supported on two +posts, and this was filled with human skulls, all in +an advanced stage of decay.</p> + +<p>It was noticed only by accident, as the area around +the hut was thickly grown up by the vegetation. +The boys were naturally startled at the sight.</p> + +<p>"What does that mean?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>John replied: "This is evidence that the people +here are head hunters."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by <i>head hunters</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Certain savages have the belief that their importance +depends on the number of heads they can +capture."</p> + +<p>"Where do they get them?"</p> + +<p>"It is necessary for them to kill their enemies, and +impale the heads, or nail them up to their huts."</p> + +<p>"Is it a religious ceremony?"</p> + +<p>"In some cases that is so. In some tribes the +object is merely to show bravery and manliness. +The more heads a man possesses the braver he is."</p> + +<p>The vicinity of the hut was carefully examined,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_236" id="p_236">p. 236</a></span> +and Uraso brought to John a very curiously arranged +shell, with a handle to it. It was, in fact, a +rattle. John took the article, and after examining +it for some time, remarked:</p> + +<p>"These people will be difficult to deal with; very +difficult."</p> + +<p>"Why do you form that conclusion from the examination +of the rattle?"</p> + +<p>"This is a vele."</p> + +<p>"A <i>vele</i>; and what in the world is that?"</p> + +<p>"A vele is a sort of hoodoo; it is something that +many natives believe in with such tenacity that if +any one having this rattle points to him and declares +him veleed, and announces that the veleed one +will die the next day, he will lay down and actually +expire as predicted."</p> + +<p>"Do you believe such tales?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Of course those stories are hard to understand, +but the missionaries on the Melanesian Islands vouch +for many things similar to that. In 1871, Bishop +Patterson, one of the missionaries, was murdered by +the natives of those islands, and many of the facts +in regard to their customs were then established."</p> + +<p>"But how do they work the vele?"</p> + +<p>"The place where the vele is worked to the most +unlimited extent is in the Island of Guadalcaner, one +of the Solomon Islands, although it has its counterpart +in many other places. The vele rattler is carefully +kept in a bamboo box, and when the owner +wishes to destroy an enemy he takes the vele, and +searches for him.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_237" id="p_237">p. 237</a></span></p> + +<p>"In doing so he must not be seen by any one. If +he is seen the vele will not be effective. When he +finds his enemy the vele is pointed to the man, and the +rattles shaken, and while doing so the one exorcising +the spell must turn his face away and utter curses. +As soon as his enemy hears this, he turns to see who +has veleed him, and he then glances around to see +if any one has seen the vele."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that the rattle is for that purpose?"</p> + +<p>"There is no question of it, and it is an evidence +that the natives are intensely superstitious, and such +people are very difficult to deal with."</p> + +<p>"I suppose we shall have witch doctors to deal +with here?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"That is a very natural supposition."</p> + +<p>"Did you see some of these things when you came +over here yesterday?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>It was evident to both boys that they were going +direct to the mountains, and the general character +of the surroundings reminded them so much of the +mountains on Wonder Island, that they felt assured +John would be able to find the cave for which he was +searching.</p> + +<p>That night they encamped on a small stream which +was, no doubt, formed by a spring, as its waters were +deliciously cool, and refreshing.</p> + +<p>During that night, shortly after twelve o'clock, the +boys heard the most peculiar noises, like a doleful, +continuous cry, echoed and reechoed from hill to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_238" id="p_238">p. 238</a></span> +mountain,—something indescribable, but they refrained +from saying anything to John about it.</p> + +<p>Some of the boys who were present and heard it +were singularly affected, and it must be said that the +boys themselves, notwithstanding the experiences +they had passed through, were not altogether composed +in their minds.</p> + +<p>When Uraso and Muro appeared next morning, +after a night of scouting, they were startled by the +accounts which were furnished, as to the number and +warlike character of the inhabitants, and a council +was held to decide whether it would be advisable to +proceed with their limited force.</p> + +<p>If they knew, beyond question, that the island was +occupied by another tribe, it might enable them to +make peace with one of them, and thus pave the way +for approaching these people.</p> + +<p>It was unfortunate that the first contact with the +natives brought them into open hostilities, much as +they desired to avoid it, but it was too late now.</p> + +<p>"From your investigations," said John, addressing +the two chiefs, "can you give any idea of the +number of natives in this tribe?"</p> + +<p>"We were unable to get near the village, but during +the night we touched three different parties, one +over by the high ridge, one a mile to the front, and +the other over in the open ground not far from the +place we had the fight. If I can judge anything by +that I should say they have a number of warriors," +answered Uraso.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_239" id="p_239">p. 239</a></span></p> + +<p>"That does, indeed, look as though they are ready +to meet us from whatever direction we may attack +them," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"The thing which is the most singular to me," +remarked Muro, "is the way they are coming at us +after the fight over there. If they were a weak lot +they would draw off, and keep away from us, and +that makes me think they have a lot of warriors, and +are simply waiting until they can collect all of +them."</p> + +<p>"We must do one of two things," ventured John, +on reflection. "Either to go on with the men we have, +or to wait until the <i>Pioneer</i> returns, and then go +back with her and fit out a force of ample size to meet +them. It is our wish to win over the people by +peaceful means, but our weakness may be the worst +possible way of accomplishing that purpose."</p> + +<p>Uraso and Muro were both in favor of returning +and waiting for the <i>Pioneer</i>, as they knew it would +be likely to show up within the next three days, and +their views decided the matter.</p> + +<p>"Under the circumstances we must leave this +place before it is too late in the day, or we may have +trouble in reaching the landing, although we can +easily hold them off with our rifles, but we must +avoid bloodshed," and on this point John was insistent.</p> + +<p>The camp was astir and all the equipment in hand +within fifteen minutes, although they had not yet +partaken of breakfast. Uraso took the first turn, as<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_240" id="p_240">p. 240</a></span> +commander of the rear guard, while the main body +hurried on to cross the valley, before the savages +could get the first notice of the retirement.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the great caution displayed, several +shots were heard before the slope on the other +side was reached, and they knew that Uraso was +engaged.</p> + +<p>It is difficult, sometimes, to know just how information +travels among savage people, but in this +case, the peculiar beatings of the drums which could +be heard in the dim distance, was sufficient to satisfy +Muro that they had watchers, and a signaling means +from treetops and from the crests of the great hills +all around them.</p> + +<p>An hour afterwards Uraso's men were seen in the +distance, and, although they had fired no more shots, +it was evident that the natives were now in force and +pressing against him with all their might. Only the +consummate skill of Uraso prevented them from +rushing the men under his command.</p> + +<p>But the top of the hill was reached; the landing +was not much more than a mile beyond that, and +John hurriedly took a half dozen men, and George +and Harry with him, in order to select the final line +of defense within reach of the landing place, while +Uraso and Muro held them in check.</p> + +<p>The boys were ahead of the little party, swinging +along and trying to get to the elevated point which +John indicated as the most available place, when two +powerful natives sprang across their path, and before +either could draw a weapon, they were pounced<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_241" id="p_241">p. 241</a></span> +upon and seized by two more who approached from +the rear.</p> + +<p>With great presence of mind Harry cocked and +fired the gun which his captors were struggling for. +The shot went through the arm of the native who had +seized George, and the latter, now free, raised his +rifle and brought it down with all force on the nearest +one.</p> + +<p>John and the men with him needed no further information +as to the situation. They were practically +surrounded. That was his first thought; but, as no +more natives appeared, and the two remaining savages +started on a run it began to be evident that they +were only scouts who expected an easy capture of +the two boys.</p> + +<p>There was no more straggling or running ahead +after that. Uraso and the rear guard came up with +a rush on hearing the shots, but were reassured when +they saw the party intact.</p> + +<p>The heights were gained, and before they could +arrange for the defense the natives appeared from +three quarters, and held off a quarter of a mile beyond.</p> + +<p>During the following day John tried to establish +communications with the natives, but they rebuffed +all efforts, and the arrival of the <i>Pioneer</i> was anxiously +awaited.</p> + +<p>On the third day the natives were observed closer +at various points, and they began to grow bolder, but +at noon of the fourth day the sharp eyes of Muro discovered +the glimpse of a sail to the west.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_242" id="p_242">p. 242</a></span></p> + +<p>Within two hours the form of the ship could be +seen. The <i>Pioneer</i> was making for the landing, and +a cheer went up from the men at the welcome sight.</p> + +<p>There was not much difficulty in descending the +cliffs and establishing communications with the vessel, +and within an hour they were aboard and the +natives could plainly be seen coming down the opposite +slope waving defiance to the ship.</p> + +<p>The next day the <i>Pioneer</i> sailed up Enterprise +River. The people in Unity were anxious to learn of +the new island, and to hear of the exploits with the +savage tribe which the boys had encountered.</p> + +<p>"The Treasures of the Islands," the next book in +this series, relates the further experiences of the +boys upon their return to Rescue Island.</p> + +<p class="center">THE END</p> + +<hr class="major" /> + +<h2>THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS</h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By ELBERT FISHER</p> +<p class="titleblock"><i>12mo, Cloth. Many Illustrations. 60c. per Volume</i></p> + +<p style="margin-top: 1.5em">This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who +make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They +meet with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their +adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive +matter relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries +through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports +of boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The +books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each chapter, +there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the author, and four +striking halftones.</p> + +<p><b>1. From New York to the Golden Gate</b>, takes in many of the principal +points between New York and California, and contains a highly +entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a little +useful information.</p> + +<p><b>2. From San Francisco to Japan</b>, relates the experiences of the two +boys at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to +Hawaii, Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent +at sea, and a large amount of interesting information appears throughout +the text.</p> + +<p><b>3. From Tokio to Bombay</b>. This book covers their interesting +experiences in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong +and finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a +field seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the +great Hyderabad region of South India.</p> + +<p><b>4. From India to the War Zone</b>, describes their trip toward the +Persian Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the +supposed site of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves +with a caravan through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing +the Holy Land, where they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean +port of Joppa, and their experiences thereafter within the war +zone are fully described.</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> +<p class="titleblock">147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class="major" /> + +<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner +all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care +and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; +the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, +and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two +hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and +includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the +art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published +for boys.</p> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically +applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the +knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various +phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within +the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and +is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of +practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure +and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized +to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work +is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building +explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of +cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in +explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p> + +<p class="center"> +<br /> +<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i> +<br /> +<br /> +THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br /> +<span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue New York</span> +</p> + +<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;" +width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Morton" border="1"> +<tr><td> + +<h2>The Ethel Morton Books</h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By MABELL S. C. SMITH</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">This series strikes a new note in the publication of books +for girls. Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing +experiences of our young friends are combined with a +fund of information relating their accomplishment of things +every girl wishes to know.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with +many of the entertaining features of handcraft, elements +of cooking, also of swimming, boating and similar pastimes. +This information is so imparted as to hold the interest +throughout. Many of the subjects treated are illustrated +by halftones and line engravings throughout the +text.</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1.5em;"><span class="smcap">LIST OF TITLES</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Chautauqua</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Holidays</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Rose House</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Enterprise</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge</span></p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid</i></p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: .5em;">PUBLISHED BY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em; font-size: 130%">The New York Book Company</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: 1em;">147 <span class="smcap">Fourth Avenue</span> <span class="smcap">New York, N. Y.</span></p> +</td></tr></table> + +<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;" + width="380" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Mountain Boys" border="1"> +<tr><td> +<h2><span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mountain</span> <span class="u">Boys</span> <span class="u">Series</span></h2> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">1. Phil Bradley's Mountain Boys</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">2. Phil Bradley at the Wheel</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">3. Phil Bradley's Shooting Box</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">4. Phil Bradley's Snow-Shoe Trail</span></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">These books describe with interesting +detail the experiences of a party of boys +among the mountain pines.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">They teach the young reader how to +protect himself against the elements, what +to do and what to avoid, and above all to +become self-reliant and manly.</p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>12mo. * * * Cloth.</i></p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em;"><i>40 cents per volume; postpaid</i></p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em; font-size: 135%">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue New York</span></p> +</td></tr></table> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 21760-h.txt or 21760-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/7/6/21760</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/21760-h/images/cover.jpg b/21760-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..225ea17 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a18b94f --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..154ebcd --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8e6f1b --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2bb1790 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..83d8559 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c0283e --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5db6f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1afe1f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6a35b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f1815d --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..223ce0d --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc6f583 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e696972 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a13b3fd --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e6d3a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14d08b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d045074 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9c6985 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..73be164 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png b/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..26e2110 --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2322f3b --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png b/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e15b3ae --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png diff --git a/21760-h/images/inybc.png b/21760-h/images/inybc.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a9077e --- /dev/null +++ b/21760-h/images/inybc.png |
